Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX NR616 User Manual
Contents  
AV RECEIVER  
Safety Information and Introduction ............2  
Table of Contents...........................................6  
Connections .................................................12  
Turning On & Basic Operations..................20  
Advanced Operations ..................................47  
Controlling Other Components...................72  
Appendix.......................................................79  
TX-NR616  
Instruction Manual  
Internet Radio Guide  
Remote Control Codes  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information and Introduction  
5. Preventing Hearing Loss  
For U.S. models  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
The user changes or modifications not expressly approved  
by the party responsible for compliance could void the  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Precautions  
Caution  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and  
headphones can cause hearing loss.  
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure  
Warning  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use  
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without  
the permission of the copyright holder.  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your  
Onkyo dealer.  
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not  
be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the  
like.  
NOTE:  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over  
with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth  
dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and  
water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a  
clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners,  
alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because they may  
damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.  
4. Power  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more  
of the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are  
wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside  
this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer.  
8. Handling Notes  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally  
bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a  
long time, because they may leave marks on the  
case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after  
prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not  
work properly the next time you turn it on, so be sure  
to use it occasionally.  
WARNING  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION  
CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make  
sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage  
requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g., AC  
230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit  
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is  
readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.  
For models with [POWER] button, or with both  
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:  
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF mode  
does not fully disconnect from the mains. If you do not  
intend to use the unit for an extended period, remove  
the power cord from the AC outlet.  
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:  
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select  
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the  
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an  
extended period, remove the power cord from the AC  
outlet.  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
For Canadian Models  
IMPORTANT  
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs  
to be replaced, the replacement fuse must approved by  
ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating  
as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or  
the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.  
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket  
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse  
in the plug.  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
Modèle pour les Canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA  
CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003  
DU CANADA.  
For European Models  
Declaration of Conformity  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS  
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE  
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
We,  
ONKYO EUROPE  
ELECTRONICS GmbH  
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,  
82194 GROEBENZELL,  
GERMANY  
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product  
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the  
corresponding  
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.  
technical standards such as EN60065,  
For British models  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power  
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by  
qualified service personnel.  
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY  
K. MIYAGI  
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH  
IMPORTANT  
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance  
with the following code:  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings  
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the  
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured  
black.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured  
red.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information and Introduction  
■ Aiming the remote controller  
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor, as shown below.  
Supplied Accessories  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 19)  
Remote control sensor  
AV receiver  
AM loop antenna (➔ page 19)  
Power cord (Taiwanese models) (➔ page 19)  
Speaker cable labels (➔ page 13)  
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 35)  
Remote controller (RC-837M) and two batteries (AA/R6)  
(Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is not  
supplied for this unit.)  
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)  
Quick Start Guide  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product  
name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the  
same regardless of color.  
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.  
Please read this manual thoroughly before making  
connections and plugging in the unit.  
■ Installing the batteries  
Following the instructions in this manual will  
enable you to obtain optimum performance and  
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
Batteries (AA/R6)  
Note  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing the  
batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,  
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or  
corrosion.  
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage  
from leakage or corrosion.  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Safety Information and Introduction  
Playback......................................................................23  
Playing the Connected Component..........................23  
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....24  
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................25  
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB...............................25  
Playing a USB Device...............................................26  
Listening to vTuner Internet Radio............................27  
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................28  
Changing the Icon Layout  
on the Network Service Screen..............................28  
Playing Music Files on a Server ...............................29  
Remote Playback......................................................30  
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................31  
Using Basic Functions...............................................34  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup.........................34  
Using the Listening Modes .......................................37  
Using the Home Menu..............................................44  
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................45  
Setting the Display Brightness..................................45  
Displaying Source Information..................................45  
Changing the Input Display.......................................45  
Using the Whole House Mode..................................46  
Using the Music Optimizer........................................46  
Muting the AV Receiver............................................46  
Using Headphones ...................................................46  
Table of Contents  
Controlling Other Components  
iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock.................... 72  
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 72  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 73  
Controlling Other Components................................. 74  
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 74  
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 74  
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 75  
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 75  
Remote Control Codes  
for Onkyo Components Connected via u............ 76  
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 76  
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 76  
Controlling Other Components................................. 76  
Safety Information and Introduction  
Important Safety Instructions......................................2  
Precautions ...................................................................3  
Supplied Accessories...................................................5  
Table of Contents..........................................................6  
Features.........................................................................7  
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8  
Front Panel..................................................................8  
Display ........................................................................9  
Rear Panel ................................................................10  
Remote Controller.......................................................11  
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................11  
Appendix  
Connections  
Troubleshooting......................................................... 79  
Firmware Update ........................................................ 85  
Connection Tips and Video Signal Path .................. 89  
Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player,  
or Recorder .............................................................. 92  
About HDMI................................................................. 94  
Network/USB Features............................................... 95  
License and Trademark Information ........................ 98  
Specifications............................................................. 99  
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................12  
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................12  
About AV Connections..............................................15  
Connecting Components with HDMI.........................16  
Connecting Your Components..................................17  
Connecting Onkyo uComponents.........................18  
Connecting the Antennas..........................................19  
Connecting the Power Cord......................................19  
Advanced Operations  
On-screen Setup.........................................................47  
Using the Quick Setup..............................................47  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup..................48  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................50  
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator ...................51  
Setup menu items.....................................................51  
Input/Output Assign ..................................................52  
Speaker Setup..........................................................54  
Audio Adjust..............................................................57  
Source Setup............................................................59  
Listening Mode Preset..............................................63  
Miscellaneous...........................................................64  
Hardware Setup........................................................65  
Remote Controller Setup ..........................................68  
Lock Setup................................................................69  
Multi Zone....................................................................70  
Making Multi Zone Connections ...............................70  
Controlling Multi Zone Components .........................71  
Turning On & Basic Operations  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it  
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press  
8ON/STANDBY (➔ page 79).  
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................20  
Turning On ................................................................20  
Turning Off ................................................................20  
Initial Setup..................................................................21  
Selecting the Language  
for the Onscreen Setup Menus...............................21  
Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup.......................................21  
Source Connection....................................................22  
Remote Mode Setup.................................................22  
Network Connection..................................................22  
Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................22  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Connections  
Features  
Amplifier  
• 8 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs  
• Onkyo pfor System Control  
• 4 Digital Inputs (2 Optical/2 Coaxial)  
• 100 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)  
• 160 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)  
• 175 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)  
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High  
Power Transformer  
• Component Video Switching (1 Input/1 Output)  
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts  
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio  
amplifier is prohibited.  
• Powered Zone 2  
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR  
• Internet Radio Connectivity  
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design  
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files  
• 2 USB Inputs (Front/Rear) for Memory Devices and  
Processing  
• THX Select2 Plus Certified  
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video  
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)  
®
®
iPod /iPhone models (Enables Display of Album  
Artwork)  
*
Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with  
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD  
High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital  
Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM)  
iPod/iPhone.  
• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input  
Miscellaneous  
®
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX  
• 40 FM/AM Presets  
• Audyssey 2EQ to correct room acoustic problems  
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction  
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal  
listening level and dynamic range  
• Crossover Adjustment  
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)  
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)  
• Auto Standby Function  
• Non-Scaling Configuration  
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory  
• Direct Mode  
• Pure Audio Mode (European, Australian and Asian  
models)  
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters  
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP  
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology  
®
®
®
• On-Screen Display via HDMI  
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Front & Rear Panels  
Front Panel  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
a
b c d e  
f g h i j k  
l
w
x
m n o p  
q
v
rs t u  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
a 8ON/STANDBY button (20)  
b ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons (46, 71)  
c Remote control sensor (5)  
j TUNING q/w(31), PRESET e/r(32), cursor and  
t USB port (17)  
ENTER buttons  
u SETUP MIC jack (35)  
v HYBRID STANDBY indicator (51)  
k RETURN button  
l MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (23)  
w PURE AUDIO button and indicator (European,  
m MUSIC OPTIMIZER button and indicator (North  
Australian and Asian models) (37)  
d Display (9)  
American and Taiwanese models) (46, 49)  
x RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and  
e LISTENING MODE buttons (37)  
n PHONES jack (46)  
Asian models) (33)  
f DIMMER button (North American and Taiwanese  
o AUX INPUT HDMI/MHL jack (16)  
p TONE and Tone Level buttons (48)  
q Input selector buttons (23)  
r DISPLAY button (45)  
models) (45)  
g MEMORY button (32)  
h TUNING MODE button (31)  
i SETUP button (50)  
s VIDEO jack (17)  
En-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Display  
s
abcde  
f
g h  
i
j
k l m n k e  
o
p q r  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (71)  
i Tuning indicators  
q Channel/Unit indicators  
ch indicator  
RDS indicator (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models) (32)  
Hz indicator  
b Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (71)  
AUTO indicator (31)  
TUNED indicator (31)  
FM STEREO indicator (31)  
j MUTING indicator (46)  
k Input indicators (90)  
HDMI indicator (66)  
m/ft indicator  
c 3D indicator  
dB indicator  
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected.  
r ASb indicator (67)  
d Headphone indicator (46)  
e 1, 3and cursor indicators (25)  
f Listening mode and format indicators (37)  
g Audyssey indicator (34, 59)  
Audyssey DSX indicator (41)  
DIGITAL indicator  
l ARC indicator (66)  
m USB indicator (25, 26)  
n NET indicator (27 to 30, 68)  
o Message area  
Dynamic EQ indicator (59)  
Dynamic Vol indicator (59)  
h M.Opt indicator (46, 49)  
p SLEEP indicator (45)  
En-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Rear Panel  
(North American, European, Australian and Asian models)  
(Taiwanese models)  
g
a b c d  
e
f
h
n
i
j
k
l m  
a DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks  
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks  
c USB port  
j Composite video and analog audio jacks  
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME  
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN)  
k MONITOR OUT V jack  
d ETHERNET port  
l SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks  
m ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks  
n AC INLET (Taiwanese models)  
e FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal  
f HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and  
HDMI OUT SUB) jacks  
g SPEAKERS terminals  
See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection  
(➔ pages 12 to 19).  
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND, SURROUND  
BACK or FRONT HIGH, ZONE 2)  
h Power cord (North American, European, Australian  
and Asian models)  
i u REMOTE CONTROL jack  
En-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVERto select  
Receiver mode.  
Remote Controller  
You can also use the remote controller to control  
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and  
other components.  
Controlling the AV Receiver  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more  
details (➔ page 75).  
gc  
a
b
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
a 8RECEIVER button (20)  
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons (23)  
c q/w/e/rand ENTER buttons  
d Q SETUP button (47)  
h
i
e Listening Mode buttons (37)  
f DIMMER button (45)  
d
g DISPLAY button (45)  
ac  
h MUTING button (46)  
j
k
d
i VOL q/wbutton (23)  
j RETURN button  
k HOME button (44)  
l SLEEP button (45)  
e
■ Controlling the tuner  
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press AM or FM (or  
RECEIVER).  
e
a q/wbuttons (31)  
b D.TUN button (31)  
c DISPLAY button  
d CH +/– button (32)  
e Number buttons (31)  
bf  
l
En-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting the AV  
Receiver  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
Connecting Your Speakers  
Speaker Configuration  
The following table indicates the channels you should use  
depending on the number of speakers that you have.  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered  
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid  
bass.  
To get the best from your surround sound system, you need  
to set the speaker settings automatically (➔ page 34) or  
manually (➔ page 54).  
Number of speakers  
Front speakers  
2 3 4 5 6 7 7  
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
Center speaker  
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
Surround speakers  
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
Surround back/  
Front high  
left  
Front right  
Front left  
Center  
Surround back/  
Front high  
right  
*1*2  
Surround back speaker  
✔
✔
✔
*2  
Surround back speakers  
*2  
Front high speakers  
■ Screw-type speaker terminals  
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the ends  
of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as  
shown.  
■ Push-type speaker terminals  
Strip 3/8" to 1/2" (10 to 12 mm) of insulation from the ends  
of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as  
shown.  
*1  
*2  
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals.  
Front high and surround back speakers cannot be used at the  
same time.  
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)  
3/8" to 1/2"(10 to 12 mm)  
Connecting the Speaker Cables  
The following illustration shows how to connect the  
speakers to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one  
surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND  
BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals.  
■ Banana Plugs (North American models)  
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker  
terminal before inserting the banana plug.  
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center  
hole of the speaker terminal.  
Tip  
• You can specify whether surround back or front high speakers are  
connected in the “Speaker Configuration” menu (➔ page 54) or  
during Audyssey 2EQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
(➔ page 34).  
En-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Connections  
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker  
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.  
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before  
making any connections.  
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels  
The speaker terminals are color-coded for identification  
purpose.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other  
words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)  
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–)  
terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the  
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.  
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.  
Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
Speaker  
Color  
Front left, Front high left, Zone 2 left  
White  
Front right, Front high right, Zone 2 right Red  
Center  
Green  
Surround left  
Blue  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
Surround right  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have  
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may  
damage the AV receiver.  
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded and  
you should attach them to the positive (+) side of each  
speaker cable in accordance with the table above. Then all  
you need to do is to match the color of each label to the  
corresponding speaker terminal.  
Speaker Connection Precautions  
Read the following before connecting your speakers:  
• (North American and Taiwanese models) You can  
connect speakers with an impedance of between 6 and 16  
ohms. If you use speakers with a lower impedance, and  
use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long period  
of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may be  
activated.  
• (European, Australian and Asian models) You can  
connect speakers with an impedance of between 4 and 16  
ohms. If the impedance of any of the connected speakers  
is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6 ohms, be sure to set the  
minimum speaker impedance to “4ohms” (➔ page 54).  
If you use speakers with a lower impedance, and use the  
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of time,  
the built-in protection circuit may be activated.  
En-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Using Dipole Speakers  
Using Powered Subwoofers  
Bi-amping the Front Speakers  
Important:  
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove  
the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter (high) and  
woofer (low) terminals.  
LINE INPUT  
LINE INPUT  
TV/screen  
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support bi-  
amping. Refer to your speaker manual.  
LINE INPUT  
LINE INPUT  
Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble performance.  
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive  
up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.  
a
a
Powered subwoofer  
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections as  
shown and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the  
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔ page 54).  
b
b
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround  
back speakers. Dipole speakers output the same sound in  
two directions.  
Corner  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to  
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround  
dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so that their  
arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the surround  
back dipole speakers (b) should be positioned so that their  
arrows point toward each other, as shown.  
position  
1/3 of wall  
position  
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing  
a movie or some music with good bass, experiment by  
placing your subwoofer at various positions within the  
room, and choose the one that provides the most satisfying  
results.  
Tweeter (high)  
Woofer (low)  
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.  
The same signal is output from each jack.  
Tip  
Front right  
Front left  
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an external  
amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the  
amplifier.  
En-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
■ Analog audio (RCA)  
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.  
AV Cables and Jacks  
About AV Connections  
■ HDMI  
Connecting AV components  
White  
Red  
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.  
a
HDMI cable  
: Video & Audio  
TV, projector, etc.  
*1  
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are  
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4 and  
192 kHz are also supported.  
■ Component video  
AV receiver  
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color  
difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best picture  
quality (some TV manufacturers label their component  
video sockets slightly differently).  
Note  
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.  
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type covers  
that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it’s  
removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Y
Blu-ray Disc/  
DVD player  
PB  
PR  
Caution  
Game console  
: Audio  
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight  
when inserting and removing.  
Other cables  
: Video  
■ Composite video  
TV, projector, etc.  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs, and  
other video equipment.  
AV receiver  
Yellow  
■ Optical digital audio  
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
*1  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio  
Blu-ray Disc/  
DVD player  
quality is the same as coaxial.  
Game console  
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals  
supplied with your AV components.  
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and  
double-checked all AV connections.  
■ Coaxial digital audio  
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
*1  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio  
• Push plugs in all the way to make  
good connections (loose connections  
can cause noise or malfunctions).  
• To prevent interference, keep audio  
and video cables away from power  
cords and speaker cables.  
Right!  
quality is the same as optical.  
Orange  
Wrong!  
En-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting Components with HDMI  
Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.  
Personal computer  
Game console  
TV, projector, etc.  
Camcorder, etc.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
Set top box/Digital video recorder, etc.  
*
*
If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return Channel (ARC), you  
need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI  
cable to the AV receiver.  
When listening to an HDMI component through the AV  
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen  
on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI  
component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV power is off  
or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no  
sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off.  
Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The  
default input assignments are shown below.  
Tip  
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI  
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”  
(➔ page 66) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.  
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 52).  
Jack  
IN1  
Components  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.  
Set top box/Digital video recorder, etc.  
Game console  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Note  
IN2  
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is output  
despite following the above-mentioned procedure, set your Blu-  
ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to PCM.  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
Personal computer  
Other components  
Other components  
Camcorder, etc.  
■ Audio Return Channel (ARC) function  
The Audio Return Channel (ARC) function enables an  
HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT  
MAIN on the AV receiver.  
• This function can be used when:  
– Your TV is ARC capable, and  
– The TV/CD input selector is selected, and  
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”(➔ page 65), and  
– “Audio Return Channel” is set to “Auto” (➔ page 66).  
IN6  
IN7  
Front  
OUT MAIN  
OUT SUB  
TV  
Projector, etc.  
See also:  
• “Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” (➔ page 89)  
• “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder”  
(➔ page 92)  
■ MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)  
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),  
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver high-  
definition video from a connected mobile device.  
• “About HDMI” (➔ page 94)  
En-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Note  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
Connecting Your Components  
A B  
*1  
When the USB input is selected, you can input video signals  
from the VIDEO jack. Video signals input from VIDEO will  
be output from the MONITOR OUT and HDMI output jacks.  
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on  
your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played  
through the AV receiver in this way.  
Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with  
iPod/iPhone.  
Connect a turntable (MM) that has a phono preamp built-in. If  
your turntable (MM) doesn’t have it, you’ll need a  
commercially available phono preamp.  
*2  
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 53).  
No. Jack/Port  
Components  
*3  
*4  
*1  
iPod/iPhone (video  
playback)  
USB, VIDEO  
A
B
C
*2*3  
USB  
iPod/iPhone, MP3 player,  
USB flash drive  
If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll  
need a commercially available MC head amp or MC  
transformer as well as a phono preamp. See your turntable’s  
manual for details.  
DIGITAL IN  
OPTICAL 1 (GAME)  
OPTICAL 2 (TV/CD)  
Game consoles  
TV, CD player  
✔
✔
✔
✔
COAXIAL 1 (BD/DVD) Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
• With connection C, you can enjoy Dolby Digital and  
DTS. (To listen in Zone 2/3 as well, use C and F.)  
COAXIAL 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite/cable set-top box,  
RI dock, etc.  
• With connection F, you can enjoy audio from external  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
D
components while you are in Zone 2/3.  
IN (CBL/SAT)  
Satellite/cable set-top box,  
RI dock, etc.  
✔
• With connection F, if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs, be  
sure to connect the main stereo.  
C D B  
E
F
OUT  
TV, projector, etc.  
Router  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
BD/DVD IN  
CBL/SAT IN  
E
F
TV, projector, etc.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
Satellite/cable set-top box,  
etc.  
STB/DVR IN  
Set top box/Digital video  
recorder, etc  
GAME IN  
PC IN  
Game console, RI dock  
Personal computer  
TV/CD IN  
TV, CD player, cassette  
tape deck, MD, CD-R,  
Turntable , RI dock  
*4  
Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The  
default input assignments are shown below. See  
“Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” for more  
information (➔ page 89).  
En-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Connections  
Connecting Onkyo uComponents  
Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected  
with an analog audio cable (connection F in the  
1
hookup examples) (➔ page 17).  
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).  
2
3
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck,  
change the Input Display (➔ page 45).  
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the following  
special functions:  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
■ System On/Auto Power On  
e.g., cassette tape deck  
When you start playback on a component connected via  
u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV  
receiver will automatically turn on and select that  
component as the input source.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
■ Direct Change  
RI Dock  
When playback is started on a component connected via  
u, the AV receiver automatically selects that  
component as the input source.  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to  
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,  
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor instead of the component. You  
must enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(➔ page 76).  
Note  
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are supplied  
with Onkyo components.  
■ Remote Control  
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect either  
one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting  
additional u-capable components.  
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting other  
manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction.  
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer to the  
manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.  
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and Direct  
Change ufunctions do not work.  
En-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting the Antennas  
Connecting the Power Cord  
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.  
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use  
the tuner.  
(Taiwanese models)  
1
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV  
receiver’s AC INLET.  
North American and  
Taiwanese models  
European, Australian  
and Asian models  
To AC wall outlet  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Push.  
Insert wire.  
Release.  
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.  
Assembling the AM loop antenna  
Caution  
2
• Be careful not to injure yourself  
when using thumbtacks.  
Note  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your  
speakers and AV components.  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge  
that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same  
circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different  
branch circuit.  
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV  
receiver. The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use  
with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other  
equipment.  
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the  
other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause  
an electric shock. Always disconnect the power cord from the  
wall outlet first, and then the AV receiver.  
AM loop antenna (supplied)  
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)  
Note  
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible  
reception.  
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.  
Tip  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM  
antenna.  
En-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps  
Turning On  
Turning On/Off the AV  
Receiver  
(Initial Setup)  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to  
help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for  
the very first time. These settings only need to be made  
once. See “Initial Setup” for details (➔ page 21).  
1
or  
8ON/STANDBY  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the  
remote controller.  
■ If the “Firmware Update Available” window  
appears.  
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.  
When a new version of the firmware is available, the  
notification window “Firmware Update Available”  
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV  
receiver is connected to your home network  
(➔ page 95). To perform the firmware update, follow  
the instructions on screen.  
Turning Off  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
1
or  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the  
remote controller.  
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote  
controller to select one of the options.  
`Update Now:  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To prevent  
any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver,  
always turn down the volume before you turn it off.  
Starts the firmware update.  
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 85).  
`Remind me Later:  
Tip  
The update notification will pop up again the next  
time you turn the AV receiver on.  
`Never Remind me:  
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the  
status of settings (➔ page 51).  
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto Standby”  
8RECEIVER  
(➔ page 67).  
Disables the automatic update notification.  
Tip  
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in  
“Update Notice” (➔ page 68).  
RECEIVER  
En-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Selecting the Language for the  
Onscreen Setup Menus  
Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup  
Initial Setup  
This section explains the settings that we recommend you  
to make before using the AV receiver for the very first  
time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time use to let  
you perform those settings.  
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.  
This step determines the language used for the onscreen  
setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD Setup”  
(➔ page 65).  
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and  
1
then press ENTER.  
`Do it Now:  
Tip  
The automatic speaker setup is performed  
following instructions on screen. Refer to step 2  
of “Using the Automatic Speaker Setup”  
(➔ page 34). When this setting is complete, the  
setup wizard continues to “Source Connection”.  
`Do it Later:  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the initial  
setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu  
(➔ page 68).  
After selecting the language for on-screen setup menus, a  
welcome screen is displayed.  
Skips this setting.  
Initial Setup  
Press ENTER and continue to “Source  
Connection”.  
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all  
the speakers and devices? Before starting, please connect speakers  
and sources. Now, would you like to start initial setup?  
1st Step : Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup  
2nd Step : Source Connection  
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup  
4th Step : Network Connection  
Yes  
No  
HOME Exit  
Use q/won the AV receiver or remote controller to  
1
select one of the following options, and then press  
ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Continues to “Audyssey 2EQ: Auto Setup”.  
`No:  
Skips the settings and terminates the initial  
setup. The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the  
Initial Setup” (➔ page 22). You can always  
restart the initial setup by selecting “Initial  
Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu  
(➔ page 68).  
En-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Source Connection  
Remote Mode Setup  
Network Connection  
This step checks the connection of source components.  
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for the  
components you want to operate.  
This step checks your network connection.  
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and  
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and  
1
1
then press ENTER.  
`Yes, Continue:  
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and  
then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
1
then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Performs the checkings.  
Performs the checkings.  
Performs the remote control code input. Refer to  
step 5 of “Looking up for Remote Control  
Codes” (➔ page 74).  
`No, Skip:  
`No, Skip:  
Skips this step and continues to “Remote Mode  
Setup”.  
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.  
Note  
`No, Skip:  
Select the input selector for which you want to  
• If you use both wired and wireless network connections, the  
wireless will take priority.  
For further details, see the instruction manual provided with  
your wireless device.  
2
Skips this step and continues to “Network  
Connection”.  
check the connection and press ENTER.  
The picture of the corresponding source should appear  
on screen with a verification prompt.  
When you’re finished, select one of the following  
options and press ENTER.  
`Yes, Done:  
The setup wizard continues to “Network  
Connection”.  
`No, not yet:  
2
Follow the instructions on screen to perform the  
network checking.  
The checking is complete when the message  
“Successfully connected.” appears at the middle of  
the screen. Press ENTER to terminate the initial  
setup.  
When prompted, use q/wto select one of the  
2
3
following options and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Confirms that the source is properly displayed.  
`No:  
You can enter other remote control codes.  
Displays an error report. Follow the  
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the  
source.  
If an error message appears, select one of the  
following options and press ENTER.  
3
`Retry:  
Performs the checking again.  
`No, Do it Later:  
Use q/wto select one of the following options, and  
4
then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.  
The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the  
Initial Setup”.  
Returns to step 2.  
`No, Done Checking:  
The setup wizard continues to “Remote Mode  
Setup”.  
Terminating the Initial Setup  
This step ends the initial setup process.  
Press ENTER.  
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in  
1
the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 68).  
En-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Operating on the AV receiver  
Playing the Connected Component  
Playback  
Input selector buttons  
LISTENING MODE MASTER VOLUME  
■ Operating with the remote controller  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
RECEIVER  
This section describes the procedure for using the  
remote controller, unless otherwise specified.  
VOL q/w  
Use the input selector buttons to select the input  
source.  
1
Start playback on the source component.  
Listening mode buttons  
2
3
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME  
control.  
Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT  
SELECTOR button.  
1
Select a listening mode and enjoy!  
4
Start playback on the source component.  
2
See also:  
• “Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB” (➔ page 25)  
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 26)  
• “Listening to vTuner Internet Radio” (➔ page 27)  
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 28)  
• “Playing Music Files on a Server” (➔ page 29)  
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 30)  
■ Screen saver  
If there is no video signal on the current input source and  
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by  
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.  
Tip  
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 31)  
• “iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock”  
(➔ page 72)  
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed  
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 65).  
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is  
operated.  
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 74)  
To adjust the volume, use VOL q/w.  
3
4
Select a listening mode and enjoy!  
See also:  
• “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ page 37)  
En-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
TOP MENU  
a
b
n
o
2
Controlling Contents of USB or  
Network Devices  
This button displays the top menu for each media or service.  
This button stops playback.  
q/wand ENTER  
MODE  
These buttons navigate through the menus.  
You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended Mode  
during iPod/iPhone playback.  
Press USB or NET first.  
e/r  
RANDOM  
This button performs random playback.  
p
q
This button cycles through pages.  
PLAYLIST e/r  
REPEAT  
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects  
playlists.  
h
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat  
modes.  
c
d
1
This button starts playback.  
Tip  
7
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of  
other components (➔ page 74).  
This button selects the beginning of the current song.  
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.  
Note  
e
f
g
5
i
j
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and  
media used for playback.  
This button fast-reverses the current song.  
3
a
b
This button pauses playback.  
SEARCH  
k
l
m
n
You can toggle between the playback screen and the list  
screen during playback.  
c
d
e
f
g
DISPLAY  
h
This button switches between song information during  
playback.  
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to  
the playback screen.  
o
p
q
ALBUM +/–  
i
j
k
l
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects albums.  
MENU  
This button returns to top menu of the Internet Radio service.  
RETURN  
This button returns to the previous menu.  
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.  
m
6
This button selects the next song.  
En-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended  
Mode (Music) or Extended Mode (Video).  
Understanding Icons on the Display  
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB  
3
This section describes icons that appear on the AV  
receiver’s display during media playback.  
A list of your iPod/iPhone model’s contents appears.  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Tip  
Icon  
Description  
• If you want to operate using the iPod/iPhone or the remote  
controller, press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard  
mode.  
• When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver  
remembers the current mode. This means that if you  
disconnect when in Extended Mode (Music), the AV  
receiver will start in Extended Mode (Music) the next time  
you connect the iPod/iPhone.  
This section explains how to play music/video files on the  
iPod/iPhone.  
Compatible iPod/iPhone models  
Folder  
Track  
Made for:  
Playback  
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation), iPod classic,  
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation),  
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone  
Pause  
Use q/wto select a folder, and then press ENTER to  
• You can also use the q/w, ENTER and TUNING MODE  
buttons on the front panel. TUNING MODE allows you to  
switch modes.  
4
5
Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)”  
input.  
Fast Forward  
Fast Reverse  
Artist  
open it.  
1
Tip  
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting “USB” in the  
Home menu.  
Connect the USB cable that comes with the  
iPod/iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV  
receiver.  
While reading the contents of your iPod/iPhone, the  
message “Connecting...” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV  
receiver cannot read the iPod/iPhone.  
Use q/wto select a music/video file, and press  
2
Album  
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
Repeat One Track  
Repeat Folder (USB Device)  
Repeat  
Note  
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your  
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.  
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port, no sound will  
be output from the headphones jack.  
Tip  
Shuffle  
• When connecting your iPod/iPhone with a USB cable, we  
recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc.  
Shuffle Album (iPod/iPhone)  
En-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Extended Mode (Music) Control  
Playing a USB Device  
The music content information is displayed (lists are  
displayed), and you can control the music content while  
looking at the screen.  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Top screen list:  
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,  
Shuffle Songs, Now Playing.  
This section explains how to play music files from a USB  
device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).  
See also:  
Note  
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 95).  
• In this mode, video contents are not displayed, even if they are  
input from the VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s front panel.  
Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)” or  
“USB(Rear)” input.  
1
Extended Mode (Video) control  
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s USB  
port.  
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV  
receiver cannot read the USB device.  
2
The video content information is displayed (lists are  
displayed), and you can control the video content while  
looking at the screen.  
Top screen list:  
Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts,  
Rentals.  
Press ENTER.  
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a  
3
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press ENTER.  
Note  
Use q/wto select a music file, and press ENTER or  
4
• To view the video contents of your iPod/iPhone, connect it to the  
USB port and VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s front panel,  
using the official Apple Composite AV Cable.  
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation, the  
displayed items may vary and the support for Extended Mode  
(Video) is not guaranteed.  
1to start playback.  
Note  
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your  
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.  
Standard Mode Control  
The content information is not displayed, but can be  
operated using the iPod/iPhone or the remote controller.  
En-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to  
Favorites  
Listening to vTuner Internet Radio  
There are two ways you can register specific Internet  
radio stations (programs) from the vTuner Internet  
Radio.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (➔ page 95). The on-screen menus appear  
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Adding to My Favorites  
The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring  
radio stations from all over the world.  
You can search for stations by categories such as genre or  
location. The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service.  
The selected program will be added to “My Favorites”  
on the network service screen, which appears when  
pressing NET on the remote controller.  
1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a  
station is playing.  
Press NET.  
1
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and press  
The network service screen appears, and the NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet  
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.  
ENTER.  
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.  
Tip  
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network  
Service” in the Home menu.  
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”.  
Adding to vTuner Internet Radio’s Favorites  
Select “vTuner Internet Radio” and press ENTER to  
display the “Favorites” folder that appears on the same  
screen as “Stations By Genre”, “Stations By  
Location”, etc. This is where your favorite Internet radio  
bookmarks will be stored.  
To register your favorite stations using a personal  
computer, you need to connect your PC to the same  
network as the AV receiver. Enter the ID# (MAC  
address) of your unit on the http://onkyo.vtuner.com/.  
You can then register your favorite radio programs. The  
ID# is shown at the bottom of the “vTuner Internet  
Radio” top menu, and the AV receiver’s MAC address  
is shown on “Network” of the Setup menu  
Use q/w/e/rto select “vTuner Internet Radio”  
2
and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a program and then press  
3
ENTER.  
Playback starts.  
My Music  
0 : 11  
Great Artist  
My Favorite  
(➔ page 67).  
Tip  
• You can find stations similar to the one being played.  
During playback, press MENU on the remote controller,  
select “Stations like this” and press ENTER.  
En-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.  
The Internet radio station is then added to “My  
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press NET,  
and then select “My Favorites” on the network  
service screen. A list of registered Internet radio  
stations appears. Select the one that you saved and  
press ENTER.  
Registering Other Internet Radio  
Changing the Icon Layout on the  
Network Service Screen  
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (➔ page 95). The on-screen menus appear  
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
The layout of icons can be customized by switching their  
positions on the network service screen.  
Press NET.  
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are  
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,  
depending on the type of data or audio format used by the  
Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to some  
stations.  
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must register  
your station in “My Favorites” of the network service  
screen, as described below.  
1
The network service screen appears, and the NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet  
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.  
Tip  
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My Favorites”,  
select an empty slot in the list and press MENU. Then, select  
“Create New Station” and press ENTER.  
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen. Use that  
keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL respectively, and  
then press ENTER.  
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network  
Service” in the Home menu.  
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.  
2
Note  
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”, press  
MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing.  
Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My Favorites” and press  
ENTER. You can also delete stations from the Web Setup.  
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station and  
press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this station” and  
press ENTER.  
Use q/w/e/rto select an icon to move, and then  
destination, and then press ENTER.  
The icons switch positions and the message  
“Completed!” appears.  
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See the  
separate instructions for more information.  
3
press ENTER.  
Use q/w/e/rto select another icon as the  
4
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify your  
IP address (➔ page 68).  
1
Take a note of the IP address.  
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.  
On your computer, start your web browser.  
If you press RETURN, the “Custom Mode” process  
will be cancelled or it will go back one step.  
2
3
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s  
Internet address (URL) field.  
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also enter  
the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File” menu.  
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your  
Internet browser (Web Setup).  
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the  
Internet radio station’s name and URL.  
4
En-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Windows Media Player 11 Setup  
Use q/wto select an item, and then press ENTER or  
Playing Music Files on a Server  
5
1to start playback.  
This section explains how to configure Windows Media  
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files  
stored on your computer.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (➔ page 95). The on-screen menus appear  
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Start Windows Media Player 11.  
1
2
This section explains how to play music files on a  
computer or media server through the AV receiver (Server  
Playback).  
My favorite song 1  
0 : 11  
Artist name  
My favorite album  
On the “Library” menu, select “Media Sharing”.  
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.  
Select the “Share my media” check box, and then  
click “OK”.  
A list of the supported devices appears.  
3
Start your computer or media server.  
1
2
Note  
Press NET.  
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not  
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click  
“Allow”.  
The corresponding icon will be checked.  
The network service screen appears. The NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network  
connection.  
work.  
4
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no  
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,  
check your server, network, and AV receiver connections.  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 11  
configuration.  
Tip  
5
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network  
Service” in the Home menu.  
You can now play the music files in your Windows  
Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver.  
Use q/w/e/rto select “dlna”, and press ENTER.  
3
Tip  
Tip  
• To go back to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from  
the Microsoft web site.  
Use q/wto select a server, and then press ENTER.  
4
The menu is displayed according to the server  
functions.  
Note  
• The search function does not work with media servers  
which do not support this function.  
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be  
accessed from the AV receiver.  
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the  
AV receiver may not able to access the content. See the  
instruction manual of the media server.  
En-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Adjusting the Volume.  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 12  
configuration.  
You can now play the music files in your Windows  
Media Player 12 library.  
Remote Playback  
5
5
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume  
bar in the “Remote playback” window. The default  
maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If you wish to  
change this, enter the value from the Web Setup in  
your browser. Refer to step 3 of “Registering Other  
Internet Radio” for details (➔ page 28).  
The volume value of the remote window and the  
volume value of the AV receiver may not always  
match.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (➔ page 95). The on-screen menus appear  
only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Tip  
Remote Playback means you can play the music files  
stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV  
receiver by operating the controller device in the home  
network.  
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote control  
of my Player...” is checked.  
Using Remote Playback  
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV  
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote  
playback” window.  
Windows Media Player 12 Setup  
Turn on the AV receiver.  
1
2
This section explains how to configure Windows Media  
Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files  
stored on your personal computer.  
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
To enable remote playback, you must first configure  
Windows Media Player 12.  
Note  
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following cases:  
– Network services are being used.  
– Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod/iPhone.  
– Zones are turned on.  
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
1
2
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a  
music file.  
The right-click menu appears.  
3
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A dialog box appears.  
Tip  
• For selecting another media server, select the desired media  
server from the “Other Libraries” menu on Windows Media  
Player 12.  
Tip  
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on  
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will  
display a list of the playback devices connected to the  
network. You can skip step 3.  
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.  
4
The “Play to” window appears and playback on the  
AV receiver starts. Operations during remote playback  
can be made from the “Play to” window of Windows 7  
on your personal computer.  
A playback screen will be displayed on the connected  
TV.  
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary  
slightly depending on the network location.  
3
On the “Media streaming options”, select the AV  
4
receiver and confirm that it is set to “Allow”.  
En-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Manual tuning mode  
Tuning into Radio Stations  
Listening to AM/FM Radio  
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
■ Auto tuning mode  
This section describes the procedure of using the  
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.  
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator  
goes off on the AV receiver’s display.  
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator  
lights on the AV receiver’s display.  
1
Press and hold TUNING q/w.  
2
Using the Tuner  
Press TUNING q/w.  
The frequency stops changing when you release the  
button.  
2
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for  
quick selection.  
Searching stops when a station is found.  
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency  
one step at a time.  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM  
STEREO indicator lights as shown.  
You can also change the frequency steps (➔ page 65).  
Press AM or FM to select either “AM” or “FM”.  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
1
■ Tuning into stations by frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering  
the appropriate frequency.  
TUNED  
AUTO  
Band  
Frequency  
On the remote controller, press AM or FM to select  
“AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.  
1
FM STEREO  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
Tip  
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be  
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to  
manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter  
2
the frequency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5 or 8,  
7, 5, 0.  
If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry  
after 8 seconds.  
En-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Deleting Presets  
Presetting AM/FM Stations  
Using RDS (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite  
AM/FM radio stations as presets.  
Select the preset that you want to delete.  
1
See the previous section.  
RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available.  
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING  
MODE.  
The preset is deleted and its number disappears from  
the AV receiver’s display.  
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to store  
as a preset.  
See the previous section.  
2
1
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator lights.  
When the station is broadcasting text information, the text  
can be displayed.  
Press MEMORY.  
The preset number flashes.  
2
■ What is RDS?  
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed by  
the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available  
in most European countries. Many FM stations use it these  
days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can  
also help you find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport,  
rock, etc.).  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
While the preset number is flashing (about 8  
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset from  
1 through 40.  
Press MEMORY again to store the station or  
4
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing  
DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds.  
RT (Radio Text)  
channel.  
The station or channel is stored and the preset number  
stops flashing.  
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM/FM  
radio stations.  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text will be shown on the AV receiver’s  
display as described in the next section.  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type  
(➔ page 33).  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (➔ page 33).  
■ Selecting Presets  
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV  
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.  
Tip  
• You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to  
select a preset directly.  
To be continued  
En-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
RDS program types (PTY)  
■ Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
Note  
Type  
Display  
None  
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV receiver  
may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station. Also,  
unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported  
characters are received. This is not a malfunction.  
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be  
displayed intermittently or not at all.  
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.  
None  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
News  
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.  
1
Affairs  
Info  
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic  
Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV receiver’s  
display. If “TP” without square brackets appears, this  
means that the station is not broadcasting TP.  
Sport  
■ Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
Education  
Educate  
Drama  
Culture  
Science  
Varied  
Pop M  
Rock M  
Easy M  
Light M  
Classics  
Other M  
Weather  
Finance  
Children  
Social  
Drama  
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press  
ENTER.  
2
Press RT/PTY/TP once.  
The RT information scrolls across the AV receiver’s  
display.  
1
Culture  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that’s  
broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”  
appears.  
Science and technology  
Varied  
Note  
Pop music  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV receiver  
waits for the RT information.  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT information  
is available.  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
■ Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
Finance  
You can search for radio stations by type.  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.  
The current program type appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
Religion  
Phone In  
Travel  
Phone in  
Travel  
Use PRESET e/rto select the type of program  
Leisure  
Leisure  
Jazz  
2
you want.  
See the table shown later in this chapter.  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
Country  
Nation M  
Oldies  
To start the search, press ENTER.  
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the  
type you specified, at which point it stops briefly  
before continuing with the search.  
Folk M  
Document  
TEST  
When a station you want to listen to is found, press  
ENTER.  
4
Alarm  
Alarm!  
If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”  
appears.  
En-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Measurement procedure  
Note  
Using Basic Functions  
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio  
Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room  
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air  
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers,  
or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use)  
or place it away from all audio electronics.  
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker  
as Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup runs.  
• Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot be  
performed while a pair of headphones is connected.  
To create a listening environment in your home theater that  
all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey 2EQ takes measurements  
at up to three positions within the listening area. Position  
the microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the  
microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a  
tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your hand during  
measurements as this will produce inaccurate results.  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup  
®
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Audyssey 2EQ  
automatically determines the number of speakers  
connected, their size for purposes of bass management,  
optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer (if  
present), and distances from the primary listening position.  
Audyssey 2EQ then removes the distortion caused by room  
acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems over the  
listening area in both the frequency and time domain. The  
result is clear, well-balanced sound for everyone.  
a First measurement position  
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this  
refers to the most central position where one would  
normally sit within the listening environment.  
Audyssey 2EQ uses the measurements from this  
position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity,  
and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.  
®
Audyssey 2EQ can be used with Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume (➔ page 59).  
Before using this function, connect and position all of your  
speakers.  
Audyssey 2EQ offers two ways of measuring: the  
“Audyssey Quick Start” and “Audyssey 2EQ Full  
Calibration”.  
b Second measurement position  
The right side of the listening area.  
c Third measurement position  
The left side of the listening area.  
The distances from position ato band ato cmust be  
at least 1 meter (3.3 ft.).  
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement from one  
position to perform the speaker setting only.  
• “Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration” uses the  
measurement from three positions to correct room  
response in addition to the speaker setting.  
The more positions are used in measuring, the better the  
listening environment will become. We recommend using  
a measurement from three positions to create the best  
listening environment.  
TV  
c ab  
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes  
about 10 minutes.  
Total measurement time varies depending on the number  
of speakers.  
: Listening area  
a to c: Listening position  
En-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.  
On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver  
is connected.  
Press ENTER.  
Tip  
1
2
5
6
®
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
starts.  
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker  
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by  
using e/r.  
Test tones are played through each speaker as  
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
runs. This process takes a few minutes. Please refrain  
from talking during measurements and do not stand  
between speakers and the microphone.  
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup.  
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go to  
step 8.  
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main  
Listening Position a, and connect it to the SETUP  
MIC jack.  
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto change  
the setting.  
9
SETUP MIC jack  
After the results of Audyssey 2EQ have been saved,  
the menu will display the “Audyssey” (➔ page 59),  
“Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 59), “Dynamic Volume”  
(➔ page 59) settings.  
Note  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for  
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.  
Place the speaker setup microphone at the next  
position, and then press ENTER.  
Speaker setup microphone  
Press ENTER.  
Audyssey 2EQ performs more measurements. This  
takes a few minutes.  
10  
11  
The speaker setting menu appears.  
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.  
Note  
When prompted, repeat step 6.  
7
8
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected  
to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is connected to other  
video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing  
settings.  
Use q/wto select an option, and then press ENTER.  
Note  
• You can cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup at any point in this procedure simply by disconnecting the  
setup microphone.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during Audyssey 2EQ  
Room Correction and Speaker Setup.  
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically  
when Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts.  
• Changes to the room after Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction  
and Speaker Setup again, as room EQ characteristics may have  
changed.  
2EQ: Auto Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
-- Review Speaker Configuration --  
When you’ve finished making the settings, press  
ENTER.  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Center  
Yes  
100Hz  
40Hz  
3
4
Surround  
100Hz  
None  
120Hz  
2ch  
2EQ: Auto Setup  
Front High  
Surround Back  
Surround Back Ch  
AUDYSSEY  
Speakers Type (Front)  
Powered Zone 2  
Surround Back/Front High  
Normal  
No  
Surround Back  
Save  
Cancel  
The options are:  
`Save:  
Perform the “Speaker Setup” according to your  
speaker configuration:  
– Speakers Type (Front) (➔ page 54)  
– Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 54)  
– Surround Back/Front High (➔ page 54)  
Save the calculated settings and exit  
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup.  
`Cancel:  
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or  
“Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration”, and then press  
ENTER.  
Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup.  
En-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Error Messages  
Changing the Speaker Setup Manually  
®
You can manually make changes to the settings found  
during Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup.  
While Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup is in progress, one of the error messages below may  
appear.  
See also:  
2EQ: Auto Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
• “Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 54)  
• “Speaker Distance” (➔ page 55)  
• “Level Calibration” (➔ page 55)  
• “Equalizer Settings” (➔ page 56)  
Ambient noise is too high.  
Note  
Retry  
Cancel  
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be set  
to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your speakers using  
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup, please  
make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to  
“80Hz(THX)” crossover (➔ page 54).  
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and  
the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level  
and the distance of the subwoofer manually.  
Error message  
The options are:  
`Retry:  
Try again.  
`Cancel:  
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice  
irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main  
speakers. If this happens, THX recommends setting them  
manually.  
Cancel Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup.  
• Ambient noise is too high.  
The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of  
the noise and try again.  
• Speaker Matching Error!  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very  
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be  
detected by Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup.  
The number of speakers detected was different from that  
of the first measurement. Check the speaker connection.  
• Writing Error!  
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again. If  
this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact your  
Onkyo dealer.  
• Speaker Detect Error  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No”  
means that no speaker was detected.  
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker  
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s  
volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover  
frequency, and then try running Audyssey 2EQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the  
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection  
issues may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the  
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or  
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for  
details.  
Tip  
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings  
(➔ page 12).  
En-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
PURE AUDIO button and indicator  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
Using the Listening Modes  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display and  
video circuitry are turned off. Only video signals input  
through HDMI input can be output from an HDMI output.  
The indicator lights when this mode is selected. Pressing  
this button again will select the previous listening mode.  
Selecting Listening Modes  
See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information  
about the listening modes (➔ page 38).  
■ Listening Mode Buttons  
Press RECEIVER first.  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be  
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to  
the AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial,  
optical, or HDMI).  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
• The listening modes you can select depends on the format  
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying  
Source Information” (➔ page 45).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the  
following listening modes: Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models), Mono, Direct, and Stereo.  
PURE AUDIO  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX  
MOVIE/TV button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for use  
with movies and TV.  
MUSIC button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for use  
with music.  
MUSIC  
MOVIE/TV  
GAME  
THX  
GAME button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for use  
with video games.  
THX button  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
En-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Input Source  
Speaker Layout  
About Listening Modes  
The following audio formats are supported by the listening  
modes.  
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each  
channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker  
setup (➔ page 54).  
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with  
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
This is mono (monophonic) sound.  
A
Z
X
C
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two  
independent audio signal channels are reproduced  
through two speakers.  
S
■ Explanatory Notes  
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround  
system has five main channels of sound and a sixth  
subwoofer channel (called the point-one channel).  
D
f
ab  
c ij  
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a  
F
further sound enhancement to 5.1-channel sound  
with two additional speakers that provide greater  
sound envelopment and more accurate positioning  
of sounds.  
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround  
G
H
system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded  
sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded  
material.  
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This  
provides a center back surround channel from 5.1-  
channel sources.  
de gh  
abFront speakers  
Center speaker  
deSurround speakers  
Subwoofer(s)  
ghSurround back speakers  
ijFront high speakers  
N
B
V
c
f
En-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Speaker  
Source Layout  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
T-D (Theater-  
Dimensional)  
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual  
surround sound even with only two or three  
speakers. This works by controlling how  
sounds reach the listener’s left and right ears.  
Good results may not be possible if there’s  
too much reverb, so we recommend that you  
use this mode in an environment with little  
or no natural reverb.  
A ZXC  
S N  
D
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this  
mode emphasizes the surround channels in  
order to widen the stereo image, and  
simulates the natural reverberation of a large  
hall.  
A CN  
T – D  
S
O r c h e s t r a  
F
D
G
F
H
G
Unplugged  
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals and  
jazz, this mode emphasizes the front stereo  
image, giving the impression of being right  
in front of the stage.  
H
U n p l u g g e d  
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to  
music in this mode creates a lively sound  
field with a powerful acoustic image, like  
being at a club or rock concert.  
S t u d i o – M i x  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV  
shows produced in a TV studio, surround  
effects to the entire sound, and clarity to  
voices.  
T V L o g i c  
Game-RPG  
G a me – R PG  
Game-Action  
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic feel  
with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra  
mode.  
In this mode, sound localization is distinct  
with emphasis on bass.  
G a me – A c t i o n  
Game-Rock  
In this mode, sound pressure is emphasized  
to heighten live feel.  
G a me – R o c k  
Game-Sports  
In this mode, reverberation is increased and  
sound localization decreased slightly.  
G a me – S p o r t s  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode fills  
the entire listening area with stereo sound  
from the front, surround, and surround back  
speakers.  
XCN  
A l  
l
C h S t e r e o  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the same  
sound in mono, so the sound you hear is the  
same regardless of where you are within the  
listening room.  
F u l  
l
M o n o  
En-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Listening Modes  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Speaker  
Source Layout  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
DTS  
In this mode, audio from the input source is  
output without surround-sound processing.  
The speaker configuration (presence of  
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker  
distance, A/V Sync and much of the  
processing set via the audio setup are  
enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more  
details (➔ page 47).  
D XCN  
Pure Audio*1*2  
In this mode, the display and video circuitry  
are turned off, minimizing possible noise  
sources for the ultimate in high-fidelity  
audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry is  
turned off, only video signals input through  
HDMI IN can be output from an HDMI  
output(s).)  
A ZXC  
D T S  
*3  
S N  
DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio  
P u r e A A u d i o  
D XCN  
F XCN  
D
F
G
H
*3  
*3  
D T S – HD HR  
DTS-HD Master  
Audio  
D XCN  
F XCN  
Direct  
In this mode, audio from the input source is  
output without surround-sound processing.  
The speaker configuration (presence of  
speakers) and speaker distance settings are  
enabled, but much of the processing set via  
the audio setup is disabled. See “On-screen  
Setup” for more details (➔ page 47).  
D T S – HD MS T R  
D i r e c t  
DTS Express  
D XCN  
D XCN  
D T S E x p r e s s  
DTS 96/24*6  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24  
sources. This is high-resolution DTS with a  
96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution,  
providing superior fidelity. Use it with  
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.  
D T S 9 6 / 2 4  
Stereo  
Sound is output from the front left and right  
speakers and subwoofer.  
ZXC  
N
S t e r e o  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old movie  
with a mono soundtrack, or use it with the  
foreign language soundtracks recorded in the  
left and right channels of some movies. It  
can also be used with DVDs or other sources  
containing multiplexed audio, such as  
karaoke DVDs.  
DTS-ES Discrete*7  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete  
soundtracks, which use a discrete surround  
back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel  
playback. The seven totally separate audio  
channels provide better spatial imaging and  
360-degree sound localization, perfect for  
sounds that pan across the surround  
G V  
M o n o  
E S D i s c r e t e  
Multichannel  
This mode is for use with PCM multichannel  
sources.  
channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the  
DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-  
ES Discrete soundtrack.  
D XCN  
F
M u l  
t
i c h  
DSD*4  
In this mode, audio from the input source is  
output without surround-sound processing.  
The speaker configuration (presence of  
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker  
distance, A/V Sync and much of the  
processing set via the audio setup are  
enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more  
details (➔ page 47).  
D XCN  
DTS-ES Matrix*7  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix  
soundtracks, which use a matrix-encoded  
back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES  
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix  
soundtrack.  
G V  
D S D  
E S M a t r i x  
Dolby Digital  
D o l b y  
D
Dolby Digital Plus*5  
D XCN  
F XCN  
*3  
*3  
D o l b y  
D
+
Dolby TrueHD  
D XCN  
F XCN  
D o l b y T r u e HD  
En-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
DTS Neo:6  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*8  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel  
source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides  
a very natural and seamless surround-sound  
experience that fully envelops the listener.  
As well as music and movies, video games  
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial  
effects and vivid imaging.  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for  
up to 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven  
full-bandwidth channels of matrix decoding  
for matrix-encoded material, providing a  
very natural and seamless surround sound  
experience that fully envelops the listener.  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
M o v i e  
M u s i c  
G a m e  
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g.,  
TV, DVD, VHS).  
• DTS Neo:6 Music  
Use this mode with any stereo music source  
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).  
S XCN  
D V  
N e o : 6 C i n e m a  
N e o : 6 M u s i c  
If you’re not using any surround back  
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used  
instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.  
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,  
DVD, VHS).  
S XCN  
x
x
x
M o v i e  
M u s i c  
G a m e  
• DTS Neo:6  
N e o : 6  
This mode uses DTS Neo:6 to expand 5.1-  
channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel  
playback.  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  
Surround (Pro Logic) music source (e.g.,  
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).  
• Dolby PLIIx Game  
Use this mode with video games, especially  
those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.  
Audyssey DSX*9  
• Audyssey DSX  
D B  
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system that  
adds new speakers to improve surround  
impression. Starting with a 5.1 system  
Audyssey DSX adds only height channels  
in this deployment. The pair of Height  
channels reproduce important acoustical  
and perceptual cues, which greatly enhance  
the surround experience. In addition to  
these new Height channels, Audyssey DSX  
applies Surround Envelopment Processing  
to enhance the blend between the front and  
surround channels.  
F
A u d y s s e y D S X  
G
H
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
modes to expand 5.1-channel sources for  
7.1-channel playback.  
D V  
Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
Height  
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to  
more effectively use existing program  
material when height channel speaker  
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
Height can be used to upmix a variety of  
sources from movies and music, but are  
particularly well-suited to upmix game  
content.  
S B  
D
F
P L  
z
H e i g h t  
G
• Dolby Pro Logic II Movie +  
Audyssey DSX  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Music +  
Audyssey DSX  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game +  
Audyssey DSX  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II and  
Audyssey DSX modes can be used.  
The PLII and Audyssey DSX indicators  
light on the AV receiver’s display.  
S B  
P L  
P L  
P L  
M o v i e D S X  
M u s i c D S X  
G a m e D S X  
H
Dolby EX  
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for  
6.1/7.1-channel playback. They’re especially  
suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include  
a matrix-encoded surround back channel.  
The additional channel adds an extra  
dimension and provides an enveloping  
surround sound experience, perfect for  
rotating and fly-by sound effects.  
D V  
H
D o l b y E X  
D o l b y  
D
E X  
En-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Listening Mode  
THX  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops  
stringent standards that ensure movies are  
reproduced in movie theaters and home  
theaters just as the director intended. THX  
Modes carefully optimize the tonal and  
spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for  
reproduction in the home-theater  
environment. They can be used with 2-  
channel matrixed and multichannel sources.  
Surround back speaker output depends on  
the source material and the selected listening  
mode.  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Movie + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music + THX  
Music  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game + THX  
Games  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic  
S CN  
*8  
II/IIx and THX Cinema/Music/Games  
modes can be used.  
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light  
on the AV receiver’s display.  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX Music  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be  
used.  
D V  
H
• THX Cinema  
D CN  
F
T H X C i n e m a  
T HXMu s i c  
T H X G a m e s  
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical  
soundtracks for playback in a home theater  
environment. In this mode, THX Loudness  
Plus is configured for cinema levels and  
Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive  
Decorrelation are active.  
G
H
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on the  
AV receiver’s display.  
• THX Music  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Music  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Games  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games  
modes can be used.  
S B  
D
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to  
music, which is typically mastered at  
significantly higher levels than movies. In  
this mode, THX Loudness Plus is  
configured for music playback and only  
Timbre Matching is active.  
F
G
H
• THX Games  
THX Games mode is meant for spatially  
accurate playback of game audio, which is  
often mixed similarly to movies but in a  
smaller environment. THX Loudness Plus  
is configured for game audio levels, with  
Timbre Matching active.  
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on the  
AV receiver’s display.  
En-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Note  
*1  
(North American and Taiwanese models) This listening mode is not available.  
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.  
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will  
automatically switch to Direct.  
Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output  
the sound.  
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player, setting the  
output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.  
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.  
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.  
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.  
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:  
– Center speaker is connected.  
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema + THX Cinema  
• DTS Neo:6 Music + THX Music  
S CN  
*2  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Cinema  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Music  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Games  
The combination of DTS Neo:6 and THX  
Cinema/Music/Games modes can be used.  
The Neo:6 and THX indicators light on the  
AV receiver’s display.  
D V  
H
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*8  
*9  
• THX Select2 Cinema  
D V  
T HXS2 C i n e m a  
T H X S 2 M u s i c  
T H X S 2 G a m e s  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for  
7.1- channel playback. It does this by  
analyzing the composition of the surround  
source, optimizing the ambient and  
directional sounds to produce the surround  
back channel output.  
– Front high speakers is connected.  
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.  
• THX Select2 Music  
Dialogue Normalization  
This mode is designed for use with music.  
It expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-  
channel playback.  
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of Dolby Digital, which is used to  
keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change  
the volume control between Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD  
programs. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD, sometimes you may see a brief message in the front  
panel display which will read “DialogNorm: X dB” (X being a numeric value). The  
display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you  
want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the  
volume. For example, if you see the following message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in the  
front panel display, to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn  
down the volume control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback  
loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.  
• THX Select2 Games  
This mode is designed for use with video  
games. It can expand 5.1-channel sources  
for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
• THX Surround EX  
D V  
H
T H X S u r r E X  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for  
6.1/7.1- channel playback. It’s especially  
suited to Dolby Digital EX sources. THX  
Surround EX, also known as Dolby Digital  
Surround EX, is a joint development  
between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX Select2  
Games  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II  
Game and THX Select2 Games modes can  
be used. The PLII and THX indicators  
light on the AV receiver’s display.  
S V  
En-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
■ Network Service  
■ InstaPrevue  
Using the Home Menu  
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video  
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI  
IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT). Even with multiple  
components connected through HDMI, you can easily  
switch between inputs as their previews are displayed  
on a single screen.  
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used  
menus.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (➔ page 95).  
`With this selection, you can use various Internet radio  
services or play the contents stored in media connected  
to your home network (DLNA) (➔ pages 27 to 30).  
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short  
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait  
until it becomes operable.  
The Home menu appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
Press ENTER to display the main preview (currently  
selected HDMI input) and the additional previews  
(other HDMI inputs). Using q/wor e/rto select a  
preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch  
the AV receiver to that input source.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
Press ENTER to display the network service screen.  
If you want to use the Internet radio services, use  
q/w/e/rto select the desired service. Pressing  
ENTER again switches to that selection. If you want  
to play music files on a server, use q/w/e/rto  
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER.  
Tip  
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be filled in  
black.  
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as  
their positioning on screen (➔ page 67).  
■ USB  
Note  
`With this selection, you can play contents of portable  
players (iPod, etc.) and USB storage devices connected  
to the AV receiver’s USB port (➔ pages 25, 26).  
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short  
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait  
until it becomes operable.  
• This function cannot be selected when:  
– HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or  
– No signal is present on the current input source.  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly  
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.  
Use e/ror q/wand ENTER to make the desired  
2
selection.  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
■ Setup  
First, press USB repeatedly to select the  
“USB(Front)” or “USB(Rear)” input.  
`With this selection, you can access the common  
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.  
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu  
(➔ page 50).  
Then, press ENTER to select a drive or browse the  
contents of the media connected, followed by q/wto  
select the desired folder or track. Pressing ENTER as  
a track is selected will start playback.  
Tip  
Note  
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick  
Setup (➔ page 47).  
• Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with iPod/iPhone.  
■ Firmware Update  
`With this selection, you can update the firmware of the  
AV receiver. Note that this selection will be grayed out  
for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.  
Please wait until it becomes operable.  
Press ENTER to start the procedure (➔ page 85).  
En-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Displaying Source Information  
Changing the Input Display  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn  
off automatically after a specified period.  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo component, you  
must configure the input display so that ucan work  
properly.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY  
repeatedly to cycle through the available  
information.  
1
1
This setting can be done only from the front panel.  
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.  
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10  
minute steps.  
Press TV/CD or GAME.  
1
“TV/CD” or “GAME” appears on the AV receiver’s  
Tip  
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display when the sleep timer has been set. The  
specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds, then  
the previous display reappears.  
display.  
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver.  
Press and hold down the same button (about  
3 seconds) to change the input display.  
Repeat this step to select the desired input display.  
2
The following information can be typically displayed.  
Input source &  
volume*1  
Tip  
■ TV/CD:  
TV/CD → DOCK  
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP  
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.  
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,  
press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on SLEEP as  
the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less, the sleep  
timer will go off.  
→
TAPE  
■ GAME:  
GAME ↔ DOCK  
Listening mode  
Signal format*2  
“
Note  
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME”  
input selector, but not at the same time.  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the  
remote controller for the first time (➔ page 76).  
Setting the Display Brightness  
Sampling  
frequency*2  
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display,  
and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator off and on  
in conjunction.  
Input signal  
resolution  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER  
repeatedly to cycle through the following patterns:  
1
• Normal brightness + indicator off.  
Output resolution  
• Dim brightness + indicator off.  
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.  
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).  
*1  
When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number, and  
frequency are displayed.  
*2  
Tip  
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.  
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the  
previously displayed information reappears.  
• (North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively,  
you can use DIMMER on the AV receiver.  
En-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Using the Whole House Mode  
Using the Music Optimizer  
Using Headphones  
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to add  
extra background music to your home party; this allows  
you to enjoy the same stereo music as the main room in  
separate rooms (Zone 2/3).  
The Whole House Mode selects the same input source for  
Multi Zone as the main room’s.  
See also:  
• “Speaker Setup” (➔ page 54)  
• “Multi Zone” (➔ page 70)  
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality  
of compressed music files.  
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a  
standard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES  
jack.  
1
(North American and Taiwanese models) Press  
1
While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  
MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the front panel.  
The M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
jack, =indicator lights.  
Note  
The MUSIC OPTIMIZER indicator lights on the  
front panel.  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Powered Zone 2  
speakers are not turned off.)  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode  
is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono,  
Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian  
models).  
Tip  
While holding down ZONE 2, press ZONE 3 on the  
front panel.  
1
• Alternatively, you can use Q SETUP on the remote  
controller.  
• See “Music Optimizer” for more details (➔ page 49).  
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the input  
source for the main room or select a listening mode  
(➔ page 37).  
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV  
receiver, no sound will be output from the headphones jack.  
Note  
Muting the AV Receiver  
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio.  
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV receiver  
to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the Volume for  
Zone 2” (➔ page 71) for the volume adjustment of Multi  
Zone.  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.  
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.  
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator  
1
• The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the  
following cases:  
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.  
Tip  
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”  
(➔ page 66).  
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.  
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is  
set to standby.  
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 65)  
and you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
En-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
■ Input  
Using the Quick Setup  
On-screen Setup  
`You can select input sources and view the following  
information: the name of input selectors, input  
assignments, radio information, and ARC function  
setting.  
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two  
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the Quick  
Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).  
If an HDMI input other than HDMI IN 5, 6, and 7 is  
assigned to an input selector, a preview of the video  
■ Quick Setup  
RECEIVER  
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used  
settings. You can change settings and view the current  
information.  
*1  
stream will be displayed.  
“EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can only be selected if  
they are assigned to HDMI, component, coaxial, or  
optical inputs.  
■ Setup menu (HOME)  
ENTER  
q/w/e/r  
Use q/wto select an input source and view the related  
information. Pressing ENTER switches to the selected  
input source.  
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way to  
change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are  
organized into 9 categories.  
Q SETUP  
■ Audio (➔ page 48)  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
`You can change the following settings: “Bass”,  
“Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”,  
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.  
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
*2  
“Audyssey”, “Dynamic EQ ”,  
*2  
“Dynamic Volume ”, “Late Night”, “Music  
Optimizer”, “Re-EQ” and “Re-EQ(THX)”.  
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired selection.  
2
This section describes the procedure for using the  
remote controller unless otherwise specified.  
*3  
■ Video  
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
`You can change the following settings: “Wide Mode”  
*4  
and “Picture Mode ”.  
Explanatory Notes  
See also:  
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 61)  
■ Music Optimizer  
`Off  
`On  
a
b
*5  
■ Information  
`You can view the information of the following items:  
“Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.  
aSetting target  
*6  
■ Listening Mode  
bSetting options (default setting underlined)  
`You can select the listening modes that are grouped in  
the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”, “MUSIC”,  
“GAME”, and “THX”.  
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto select the  
listening mode. Press ENTER to switch to the  
selected listening mode.  
B D / DV D  
I n p u t  
A u d i o  
V i d e o  
I n f o r m a t i o n  
L i s t e n i n g M o d e  
To be continued  
En-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
Speaker Levels  
Note  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick  
Setup  
*1  
• The video preview is not displayed when:  
■ Subwoofer Level  
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps  
– HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or  
– No signal is present on the current input source.  
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected  
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with  
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set  
to “Yes” (➔ page 56).  
You can change various audio settings from the Quick  
Setup (➔ page 47).  
*2  
■ Center Level  
Note  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps  
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening  
to an input source.  
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV  
receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you made  
here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 55) before  
setting the AV receiver to standby.  
• These settings are not available in either of the following cases:  
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 66).  
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 65) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
*3  
*4  
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”  
cannot be selected (➔ page 52).  
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture  
Mode” (➔ page 61), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust  
the following items via the Quick Setup: “Brightness”,  
“Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to  
return to the “Picture Mode” setting.  
Tone Control  
Note  
■ Bass  
*5  
*6  
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all  
channels shown here output the sound.  
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:  
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 66).  
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 65) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted.  
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is  
connected.  
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 54) cannot be adjusted.  
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output  
from the front speakers.  
■ Treble  
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output  
from the front speakers.  
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,  
except when the Direct, Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) or THX listening mode is  
selected.  
Operating on the AV receiver  
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass” or  
“Treble”.  
1
Use – and + to adjust.  
2
En-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Advanced Operations  
®
`On  
Re-EQ  
Audyssey  
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby  
Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even  
when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching  
movies late at night when you don’t want to disturb  
anyone.  
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a  
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,  
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.  
■ Audyssey  
See “Audyssey” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 59).  
■ Dynamic EQ  
See “Dynamic EQ” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 59).  
■ Re-EQ  
`Off  
Note  
`On  
■ Dynamic Volume  
See “Dynamic Volume” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 59).  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that  
you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer,  
and with some material there will be little or no effect when you  
select the different options.  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source  
is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD.  
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is  
set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to  
“Auto”.  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,  
Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,  
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express, DSD, Dolby EX,  
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS  
Neo:6 Cinema and 5.1-channel source + Neo:6.  
Note  
• These technologies can be used when all the following conditions  
are met:  
– Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note that  
“Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey 2EQ Full Calibration”  
method.  
– Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) is selected.  
– A pair of headphones is not connected.  
■ Re-EQ(THX)  
`Off  
`On  
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot be  
used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to “Off”.  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and  
THX Select2 Cinema.  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected  
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with  
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set to  
“Yes” (➔ page 56).  
Music Optimizer  
■ Music Optimizer  
`Off  
Note  
• These settings are stored individually for each input selector. In  
THX listening mode however, the setting will return to “On”  
when the AV receiver is turned off.  
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is  
connected.  
`On  
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality  
of compressed music files. When set to “On”, the M.Opt  
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display, and the  
MUSIC OPTIMIZER indicator (North American and  
Taiwanese models) lights on the front panel.  
Late Night  
■ Late Night  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the  
options are:  
`Off  
Tip  
`Low:  
• (North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively, you  
can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV receiver.  
Small reduction in dynamic range.  
`High:  
Note  
Large reduction in dynamic range.  
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital  
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog  
audio input signals.  
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) listening mode is  
selected.  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:  
`Auto:  
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”  
automatically.  
`Off  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
En-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Explanatory Notes  
■ Screen saver  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)  
If there is no video signal on the current input source and  
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by  
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.  
Main Menu  
Speaker Setup  
a
b
Remote  
indicator  
Speaker Configuration  
Tip  
■ Subwoofer  
`Yes  
`No  
c
d
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed  
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 65).  
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is  
operated.  
RECEIVER  
aMain Menu  
ENTER  
bSub Menu  
q/w/e/r  
cSetting target  
dSetting options (default setting underlined)  
RETURN  
HOME  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
2
3
Use e/rto select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a main menu item, and then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a sub menu item, and then press  
4
5
Sub Menu  
Main Menu  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/rto  
change the setting.  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
Note  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by  
using SETUP, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.  
• During Audyssey 2EQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup,  
messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will appear on  
the AV receiver’s display.  
En-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Main menu item  
Sub menu item  
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator  
Setup menu items  
Volume Setup  
OSD Setup  
Tuner  
Miscellaneous  
(➔ page 64)  
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces power  
consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode.  
The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in either of  
the following conditions:  
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is  
off).  
Main menu item  
Sub menu item  
Monitor Out  
HDMI Input  
Component Video Input  
Digital Audio Input  
Speaker Settings  
Speaker Configuration  
Speaker Distance  
Level Calibration  
Equalizer Settings  
THX Audio Setup  
Multiplex/Mono  
Dolby  
Hardware Setup  
(➔ page 65)  
Input/Output Assign  
(➔ page 52)  
HDMI  
Auto Standby  
Network  
Initial Setup  
Remote ID  
Remote Mode Setup  
Speaker Setup  
(➔ page 54)  
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator is  
off).  
Remote Controller  
Setup  
(➔ page 68)  
HYBRID STANDBY  
Setup  
Lock Setup  
(➔ page 69)  
Audio Adjust  
(➔ page 57)  
DTS  
Audyssey DSX  
Theater-Dimensional  
LFE Level  
Audyssey  
Source Setup  
(➔ page 59)  
IntelliVolume  
A/V Sync  
Name Edit  
Picture Adjust  
Audio Selector  
BD/DVD  
Listening Mode Preset  
(➔ page 63)  
Note  
CBL/SAT  
• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to the  
Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY  
indicator won’t light.  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
PC  
AUX  
TUNER  
TV/CD  
NET  
USB  
EXTRA1  
EXTRA2  
En-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution  
supported by both TVs.  
HDMI Input  
Input/Output Assign  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if  
you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI IN 2,  
you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input  
selector.  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an  
HDMI cable, composite video and component video  
sources can be upconverted and output by the HDMI  
output. You can set this for each input selector by selecting  
the “- - - - -” option. See “Video Connection Formats” for  
more information on video signal flow and upconversion  
(➔ page 89).  
■ Resolution  
`Through:  
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at  
the same resolution and with no conversion.  
`Auto:  
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically  
convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.  
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p:  
Select the desired output resolution.  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
Main Menu  
Input/Output Assign  
Monitor Out  
*
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or  
not to have the video sources’ images output through the  
HDMI output.  
If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”  
setting is automatically set and composite video and  
`1080p/24:  
Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.  
`4K Upscaling:  
Composite video,  
component video  
*
component video sources are upconverted and output.  
Select this for an output resolution four times that of  
1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by  
your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096  
× 2160 pixels.  
HDMI  
Composite video,  
component video  
IN  
HDMI  
IN  
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT  
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture  
resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported  
by your TV.  
OUT  
Composite video,  
component video  
HDMI  
OUT  
Composite video,  
component video  
HDMI  
Note  
Here are the default assignments.  
• Depending on the incoming video signal, the video playback may  
not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered. In this  
case select anything other than “1080p/24”.  
• With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is set  
to “4K Upscaling”.  
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is fixed  
to “Through”.  
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is fixed  
to “Auto”.  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
HDMI1  
Note  
• See “Video Connection Formats” (➔ page 89) for charts  
showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution” settings  
affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver.  
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
HDMI4  
■ Monitor Out  
`Main:  
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  
MAIN.  
`Sub:  
PC  
HDMI5  
AUX  
FRONT (Fixed)  
- - - - -  
TV/CD  
EXTRA1  
EXTRA2  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
`Both:  
To be continued  
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI OUT  
MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are  
En-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
EXTRA1, EXTRA2  
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5,  
HDMI6, HDMI7:  
Select the input to which the component has been  
connected.  
`- - - - -:  
Component Video Input  
Digital Audio Input  
If you connect a video component to a component video  
input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For  
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you must assign “IN1” to the  
“BD/DVD” input selector.  
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if  
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you  
must assign “OPTICAL1” to the “TV/CD” input selector.  
Here are the default assignments.  
Here are the default assignments.  
Output composite video and component video  
sources from the HDMI output. The video output  
signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in  
“Component Video Input”.  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
COAXIAL1  
COAXIAL2  
- - - - -  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
- - - - -  
IN1  
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input  
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have already  
been assigned, you must first set any unused input  
selectors to “- - - - -” or you will be unable to assign  
HDMI1 - HDMI7 to other input selectors.  
- - - - -  
OPTICAL1  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
PC  
PC  
- - - - -  
AUX  
- - - - - (Fixed)  
OPTICAL2  
- - - - -  
AUX  
- - - - - (Fixed)  
- - - - -  
TV/CD  
TV/CD  
EXTRA1  
EXTRA2  
Tip  
EXTRA1  
EXTRA2  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in  
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 47).  
- - - - -  
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
EXTRA1, EXTRA2  
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL1,  
OPTICAL2:  
Select the input to which the component has been  
connected.  
`- - - - -:  
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
EXTRA1, EXTRA2  
`IN1:  
Select the input to which the component has been  
connected.  
`- - - - -:  
Note  
• If no video component is connected to HDMI output (even if the  
HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video  
source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained  
here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital  
Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or  
optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in the “Audio  
Selector” setting (➔ page 62).  
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while “HDMI  
Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 65), otherwise  
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation will  
not be guaranteed.  
Output composite video sources from the HDMI  
output.  
Select if the component is connected to an analog  
audio input.  
Tip  
Tip  
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in  
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 47).  
• “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” can be selected as input sources in  
“Input” of “Quick Setup” (➔ page 47).  
Note  
Note  
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently  
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 66), the “HDMI  
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.  
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.  
• When composite video and component video sources are  
upconverted for HDMI OUT SUB, only signals with a resolution  
of 480i/576i are output and the resolution remains the same. If  
your TV doesn’t support this resolution, there will be no picture  
(➔ page 91).  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in  
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 52), the same HDMI IN will be set as  
a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to use the  
coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in  
the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 62).  
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono) from a  
digital input (optical and coaxial) are 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16,  
20, 24 bit.  
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.  
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.  
En-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
speakers using Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any THX  
speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.  
`6ohms:  
Select if the impedances of all speakers are between 6  
and 16 ohms.  
Speaker Setup  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
Note  
■ Subwoofer  
`Yes  
`No  
• (North American and Taiwanese models) Speakers with an  
impedance of less than 6 ohms are not supported.  
Main menu  
Speaker Setup  
■ Speakers Type (Front)  
`Normal:  
Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers  
normally.  
`Bi-Amp:  
■ Front  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz  
Some of the settings in this section are set automatically  
®
by Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
(➔ page 34).  
Note  
Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey 2EQ  
Room Correction and Speaker Setup function, or set them  
manually, which is useful if you change one of the  
connected speakers after using Audyssey 2EQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup function.  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is  
fixed at “Full Band”.  
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front speakers.  
■ Powered Zone 2  
`No  
`Yes:  
*1  
*1  
■ Center , Surround  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz  
`None  
Zone 2 speakers can be used. (Powered Zone 2  
enabled).  
Speaker Settings  
*1*2*3*5  
Note  
■ Front High  
If you change these settings, you must run  
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
again (➔ page 34).  
`Full Band  
• If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”,  
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2  
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  
used.  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz  
`None  
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the  
“Speakers Type (Front)” setting. For details on speaker  
wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers”  
(➔ page 14).  
*1*2*3*4  
■ Surround Back  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz  
`None  
Speaker Configuration  
Note  
Note  
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 34).  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to 5.1  
speakers in the main room.  
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.  
*1  
“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is  
selected in the “Front” setting.  
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot  
*2  
With these settings, you can specify which speakers are  
connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker.  
Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low  
frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers  
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a  
crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover  
frequency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the  
speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the  
optimum crossover frequencies. If you set up your  
be selected.  
■ Speaker Impedance  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
`4ohms:  
*3  
If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”, or  
the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” together with  
Zone 2 turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or  
more but less than 6.  
*4  
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Front High”, this  
setting is automatically set to “None”.  
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Surround Back”,  
*5  
this setting is automatically set to “None”.  
En-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
Advanced Operations  
■ Surround Back Ch  
`1ch:  
Select if only one surround back speaker L is  
connected.  
`2ch:  
Level Calibration  
Note  
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”  
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is fixed to  
“- - -”.  
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the “Subwoofer”  
and “Front” settings are set for the first time to “Yes” and “Full  
Band” respectively.  
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 34).  
Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers  
are connected.  
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the  
built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the  
same at the listening position.  
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.  
Note  
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is  
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
Speaker Distance  
Note  
• These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the following  
cases:  
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 66).  
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 65) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
– The AV receiver is muted.  
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey 2EQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 34).  
■ LPF of LFE  
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)  
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz  
`Off:  
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the  
listening position so that the sound from each speaker  
arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.  
*1  
■ Left, Front High Left, Center , Front High Right,  
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.  
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,  
Surround Back Left, Surround Left  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
■ Unit  
`feet:  
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of  
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be  
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to  
sources that use the LFE channel.  
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1.0ft to 30.0ft in  
1.0 foot steps.  
*1  
■ Subwoofer  
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
`meters:  
Note  
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.30m to  
9.00m in 0.30 meter steps.  
(The default setting varies from country to country.)  
Note  
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 54).  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2  
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  
used.  
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is  
0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at  
volume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will  
be much louder.  
■ Double Bass  
■ Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right,  
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,  
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer  
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your  
listening position.  
This setting is NOT set automatically by  
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
(➔ page 34).  
®
`On  
`Off(THX)  
Note  
*1  
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 54).  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2  
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be  
used.  
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass  
sounds from the front left, right, and center channels to  
the subwoofer.  
by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu (➔ page 48).  
Tip  
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of  
each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position,  
measured with C-weighting and slow reading.  
En-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
■ Loudness Plus  
Equalizer Settings  
THX Audio Setup  
`Off  
`On  
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of  
speakers individually with a 5-band equalizer. The volume  
of each speaker can be set (➔ page 55).  
■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing  
`<1ft (<0.3m)  
`1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)  
`>4ft (>1.2m)  
You can specify the distance between your surround back  
speakers.  
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is  
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expression  
at low volume. This is only available when the THX  
listening mode is selected.  
■ Manual Equalizer  
`On:  
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker  
manually. Continue with the following procedure:  
■ Preserve THX Settings  
`Yes  
Note  
Press wto select “Channel”, and then use e/rto  
`No  
• Cannot be set if:  
1
select a speaker.  
– “Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔ page 54).  
– “Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ page 55).  
– “Powered Zone 2” is set to “Yes” (➔ page 54) and Zone 2  
turned on (➔ page 71).  
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic  
Volume have no effect in THX listening mode.  
Use q/wto select a frequency, and then use the e/r  
2
to adjust the level at that frequency.  
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from  
–6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.  
Note  
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.  
■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer  
`No  
`Yes  
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this setting  
to “Yes”.  
■ Metadata Compatible  
`On:  
When Metadata Compatible is set to “On”, valid  
metadata is transmitted via the HDMI connections,  
and can be used by other devices in the system.  
`Off:  
Tip  
• You can select: “63Hz”, “250Hz”, “1000Hz”, “4000Hz”, or  
“16000Hz”. And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”,  
“63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.  
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; high  
frequencies (e.g., 16000Hz) affect treble sounds.  
Note  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be  
When Metadata Compatible is set to “Off”, metadata  
is not transmitted via the HDMI connections.  
The HDMI connection in your system is used to deliver  
uncompressed digital audio and video information from  
one device to the next. There is also additional information  
about this digital content that can be delivered. Such  
additional information is referred to as “metadata”.  
Metadata Compatible mode should be used when there are  
home theater components in your system, such as Blu-ray  
disc players, set top boxes and displays that use this  
additional metadata. For example, Metadata Compatible  
mode should be set to ON when there are THX Media  
Director™ Enabled devices in the system. This ensures  
that this additional information can be received by your  
Onkyo AVR and can be sent to other devices that are  
connected in your home theater system, with no  
interruption.  
selected (➔ page 54).  
Use qto select “Channel”, and then use e/rto  
3
select another speaker.  
■ BGC  
`Off  
`On  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.  
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or  
“None” in the “Speaker Configuration”  
(➔ page 54).  
You can apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation  
(BGC) to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low  
frequencies for listeners sitting very close to a room  
boundary (i.e., wall).  
`Off:  
Tone off, response flat.  
Note  
Note  
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2  
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be  
selected (➔ page 54).  
• When the Direct or Pure Audio (European, Australian, and  
Asian models) listening mode is selected, the equalizer settings  
have no effect.  
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting  
(➔ page 59).  
En-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
or languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV  
broadcasts, and so on.  
Dolby  
THX Loudness Plus  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology  
featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™  
Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home  
theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a  
surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of  
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain  
sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by  
the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the  
tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is  
reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround  
channel levels and frequency response. This enables  
users experience the true impact of soundtracks  
regardless of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is  
automatically applied when listening in any THX  
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and  
THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX  
Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.  
■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)  
■ Mono  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these  
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx.  
Input Channel  
`Left + Right  
`Left  
`Right  
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing  
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or 2-  
channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.  
Panorama  
`On  
`Off  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front  
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode.  
Output Speaker  
`Center:  
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.  
`Left / Right:  
Mono audio is output by the front left and right  
speakers.  
This setting determines which speakers output mono audio  
when the Mono listening mode is selected.  
Dimension  
`–3 to 0 to +3  
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or  
backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field  
backward. Lower settings move it forward.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve  
the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s  
in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move it  
backward.  
Audio Adjust  
Note  
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 54), this setting  
cannot be selected.  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
Main menu  
Audio Adjust  
Center Width  
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can  
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.  
`0 to 3 to 7  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound  
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a  
center speaker, the center channel sound is output from  
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center  
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the  
front left and right speakers to create a phantom center).  
This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,  
allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel  
sound.  
Multiplex/Mono  
■ Multiplex  
Input Channel  
`Main  
`Sub  
`Main/Sub  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo  
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels  
To be continued  
En-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
■ PL IIz Height Gain  
■ TrueHD Loudness Management  
Theater-Dimensional  
`Low  
`Off  
■ Listening Angle  
`Mid  
`On  
`Wide:  
`High  
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late  
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.  
Select if the listening angle is 40 degrees.  
`Narrow:  
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables  
the listener to select how much gain is applied to the front  
high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and  
“High”, and the front high speakers are accentuated in that  
order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the  
listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their  
personal preference.  
Note  
Select if the listening angle is 20 degrees.  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-  
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the  
front left and right speakers relative to the listening  
position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be  
equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close  
to one of the two available settings.  
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for  
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.  
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization  
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.  
DTS  
Note  
• If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ page 54), this  
setting cannot be selected.  
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is  
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
■ Neo:6 Music  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
20°/40°  
Center Image  
`0 to 2 to 5  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel  
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this  
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and  
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the  
center channel.  
■ Dolby EX  
`Auto:  
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the  
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is  
used.  
LFE Level  
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the sound  
of the center channel to left and right (outwards).  
`Manual:  
*1  
*2  
■ Dolby Digital , DTS , Multich PCM, Dolby  
You can select any available listening mode.  
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are  
handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround back  
speakers are connected. This setting is effective with  
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only.  
*3  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD  
®
Audyssey DSX  
`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB  
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low  
Frequency Effects) channel individually for each input  
sources.  
■ Soundstage  
`–3dB to Reference to +3dB  
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when using  
Audyssey DSX.  
Note  
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when  
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or  
–QdB.  
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 54),  
this setting cannot be selected.  
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is  
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
Note  
*1  
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources  
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the following  
conditions are satisfied:  
– The center speaker is connected.  
*2  
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources  
*3  
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources  
– The front high speakers are connected.  
– Powered Zone 2 is not in use.  
En-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
■ Dynamic EQ  
`Off  
`On:  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.  
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.  
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great sound  
even when listening at low volume levels.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating  
sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into  
account human perception and room acoustics. It does so  
by selecting the correct frequency response and surround  
volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content  
sounds the way it was created at any volume level — not  
just at reference level.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film  
mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference  
response and surround envelopment when the volume is  
turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is  
not always used in music or other non-film content.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides  
three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB,  
and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the  
content is not within the standard.  
Source Setup  
1
2
3
4
5
®
“Setup”  
Main menu  
Source Setup  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Preparation  
Note  
Press the input selector buttons to select an input source.  
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology cannot  
be used.  
®
Audyssey  
■ Dynamic Volume  
`Off  
`Light:  
Activates Light Compression Mode.  
`Medium:  
Activates Medium Compression Mode.  
`Heavy:  
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by  
®
Audyssey 2EQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.  
■ Reference Level  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset  
`0dB:  
This should be selected for movie contents.  
`5dB:  
Select this setting for content that has a very wide  
dynamic range, such as classical music.  
`10dB:  
To enable the following settings, you must first perform  
the Room Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 34).  
• These technologies cannot be used when:  
–a pair of headphones is connected, or  
–either Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian  
models) or Direct listening mode is selected.  
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This setting  
affects volume the most. It quiets the loud parts, such  
as explosions, and boosts the quiet parts so they can  
be heard.  
■ Audyssey  
`Off  
`Movie:  
Select this setting for movie material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
`Music:  
Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a  
wider dynamic range. This setting should also be  
selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at  
10 dB below film reference.  
Note  
• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set the  
“Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve THX  
Settings” to “No” (➔ page 56).  
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set to  
“On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.  
`15dB:  
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other  
program material that is mixed at very high listening  
levels and has a compressed dynamic range.  
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference.  
To achieve the same reference level in a home theater  
system each speaker level must be adjusted so that  
–30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise  
produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening  
position. A home theater system automatically calibrated  
by Audyssey 2EQ will play at reference level when the  
master volume control is set to the 0 dB position. At that  
level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.  
Select this setting for music material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is  
automatically switched to “Off”.  
Note  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,  
“Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.  
En-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
IntelliVolume  
Name Edit  
®
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
You can enter a custom name for each individual input  
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When  
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.  
The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen.  
■ IntelliVolume  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each  
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your  
source components is louder or quieter than the others.  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency  
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at any  
user-selected volume setting. The result is bass response,  
tonal balance, and surround impression that remain  
constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ  
combines information from incoming source levels with  
actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for  
delivering a loudness correction solution.  
■ Name  
Use e/rto set the level.  
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then  
1
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use e  
to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use rto  
increase its input level.  
press ENTER.  
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.  
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to  
2
Note  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ works well by itself. However, if  
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press  
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.  
®
Audyssey 2EQ is on, the two technologies work in  
ENTER.  
tandem to provide well-balanced sound for every listener  
at any volume level.  
A/V Sync  
Name input area  
■ A/V Sync  
®
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
4 - 4. Name Edit  
Name  
BD/DVD  
`0msec to 800msec in 10 msec steps  
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and sound  
are out of sync. With this setting, you can correct this by  
delaying the audio signals.  
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press  
ENTER.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large  
variations in volume level between television programs,  
commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of  
movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume  
setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of  
program material is being perceived by listeners in real  
time to decide whether an adjustment is needed.  
Whenever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the  
necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the  
desired playback volume level while optimizing the  
dynamic range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into  
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is  
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,  
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity  
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping  
between television channels or changing from stereo to  
surround sound content.  
a
n
b
o
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
i
j
k
x
l
m
z
s
v
9
w
0
y
^
1
,
2
.
3
/
4
;
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
]
–
\
Space  
Shift  
Back Space  
OK  
+10  
Shift  
CLR  
All Erase  
A
N
!
B
O
˝
C
P
#
D
Q
$
E
R
F
S
&
`
G
T
’
H
I
J
K
L
M
U
(
V
)
W
_
X
=
Y
˜
Z
|
The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether  
your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if the  
“LipSync” setting is set to “On” or not (➔ page 67).  
%
<
>
?
+
{
}
Space  
Shift  
Back Space  
OK  
+10  
Shift  
CLR  
All Erase  
Note  
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) or Direct listening mode is used  
with an analog input source.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.  
En-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Operations  
*1*7  
■ Picture Mode  
`Custom:  
Picture Adjust  
Space:  
Enters a space character.  
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality  
and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.  
To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To  
return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
All settings can be performed manually.  
`Cinema:  
Select when the picture source is a movie or alike.  
`Game:  
Select when the video source is a game console.  
`Through:  
Does not adjust picture quality (changes resolution).  
`Direct:  
*1  
Shift :  
Toggles between lower and upper case characters.  
(Left)/ (Right):  
Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input  
area.  
*1*6  
■ Wide Mode  
This setting determines the aspect ratio.  
`4:3:  
*2  
Back Space :  
Moves the cursor backward and deletes one  
character.  
OK:  
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change  
resolution). The video coming from an analog input  
and output by HDMI output(s) is processed in the  
same way as “Through”.  
Confirms your entry.  
Tip  
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following  
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one  
operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge  
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”,  
“Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation” or “Color  
Temperature”.  
`Full:  
*1  
This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote  
controller.  
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the  
characters you have input.  
*2  
Tip  
*2*3*4  
• To name a radio preset, select AM or FM, and then select the  
preset (➔ page 32).  
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with CLR,  
select “OK” and then press ENTER.  
■ Game Mode  
`Off  
`On  
`Zoom:  
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video  
component (i.e., game console), select the corresponding  
input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”.  
The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will  
become poor.  
Note  
• This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors.  
`Wide Zoom:  
`Auto:  
According to the input signals and monitor output  
setting, the AV receiver automatically selects the  
“4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. See  
“Monitor Out” for details on the monitor output  
setting (➔ page 52).  
En-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
*2*4  
*1*2*4  
■ Film Mode  
■ Brightness  
Audio Selector  
`Video:  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the input  
signal is handled as a video source.  
■ Audio Selector  
`ARC:  
With this setting, you can adjust the picture brightness.  
“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.  
`Auto:  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to  
*1*2*4  
■ Contrast  
*1  
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a  
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate conversion is  
applied.  
HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the  
least. “+50” is the greatest.  
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be  
automatically selected as a priority among other  
assignments.  
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,  
automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive  
signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original  
picture.  
*1*2*4  
■ Hue  
`HDMI:  
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been  
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI  
IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or  
OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is  
automatically selected as a priority.  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue between  
“–50” and “+50”.  
*2*4*5  
■ Edge Enhancement  
`Off  
`Low  
`Mid  
*1*2*4  
■ Saturation  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the  
weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.  
`COAXIAL:  
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been  
assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and  
HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is  
automatically selected as a priority.  
`High  
With this setting, you can make the picture appear sharper.  
*2*4  
■ Color Temperature  
*2*4*5  
■ Noise Reduction  
`Off  
`Low  
`Mid  
`Warm  
`Normal  
`Cool  
`OPTICAL:  
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been  
assigned as an input source. If both optical and HDMI  
inputs have been assigned, optical input is  
automatically selected as a priority.  
With this setting, you can adjust the color temperature.  
`High  
Note  
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the  
screen. Select the desired level.  
`Analog:  
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:  
– The NET input selector is selected, or  
– “Monitor Out” is set to “Sub”.  
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.  
You can set priorities of audio output when there are both  
digital and analog inputs.  
*1  
This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller  
by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 47).  
When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other than  
Note  
*2  
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned  
to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input  
selectors.  
• When using the Whole House Mode, “Audio Selector” is fixed  
to “Analog”.  
“Custom”, this setting cannot be used.  
If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K Upscaling”  
(➔ page 52), this setting is fixed at “Off”.  
Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.  
If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting is fixed  
at “Off”.  
When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to  
“Full”.  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*1  
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector.  
*6  
But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio Return  
Channel” setting (➔ page 66).  
*7  
When “Metadata Compatible” is enabled, “Picture Mode” is  
fixed to “Direct” (➔ page 56).  
En-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Advanced Operations  
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed  
Mode)  
Use q/wto select the signal format that you want to  
set, and then use e/rto select a listening mode.  
Only listening modes that can be used with each input  
signal format can be selected (➔ pages 37 to 43).  
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening  
mode selected last will be used.  
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight  
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is  
selected.  
Listening Mode Preset  
2
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
■ Fixed Mode  
`Off:  
The format is detected automatically. If no digital  
input signal is present, the corresponding analog  
input is used instead.  
Main menu  
Listening Mode Preset  
You can assign a default listening mode to each input  
source that will be selected automatically when you select  
each input source. For example, you can set the default  
listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals.  
You can select other listening modes during playback, but  
the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV  
receiver has been set to standby.  
`PCM:  
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be  
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM  
indicator will flash and noise may also be produced.  
`DTS:  
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals  
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the dts  
indicator will flash and there will be no sound.  
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected  
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify the  
signal type in “Fixed Mode”.  
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format  
automatically. However, if you experience either of the  
following issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you  
can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off,  
try setting the format to PCM.  
Note  
• For the “AM” or “FM” input selector, only “Analog” will  
be available.  
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, only “Digital”  
will be available.  
Use q/wto select the input source that you want to  
1
■ Analog/PCM/Digital  
set, and then press ENTER.  
The following menu appears.  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turntable,  
radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD,  
DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.  
5-1. Listening Mode Preset  
BD/DVD  
Analog/PCM  
Mono/Multiplex Source  
2ch Source  
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD  
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD  
Other Multich Source  
Last Valid e r  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Note  
• For the “AUX”, “EXTRA1”, and “EXTRA2” input selectors,  
only “PCM” is available.  
■ Mono/Multiplex Source  
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a  
DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD,  
etc.).  
Note  
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the setting in  
“Audio Selector”.  
■ 2ch Source  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources, such as  
Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.  
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format  
digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies  
the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,  
such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).  
En-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD  
■ Power On Volume  
`Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)  
Miscellaneous  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format  
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).  
Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master  
Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via  
HDMI).  
`Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)  
With this preference, you can specify the volume setting to  
be used each time the AV receiver is turned on.  
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV  
receiver was turned off, select “Last”.  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
Main menu  
Miscellaneous  
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher than  
the “Maximum Volume” setting.  
■ Other Multich Source  
Volume Setup  
Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel  
PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and  
DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.  
■ Volume Display  
`Absolute:  
Displayed range is Min, 1 to 99, Max.  
`Relative (THX):  
■ Headphone Level  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB  
With this setting, you can specify the headphone volume  
relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a  
volume difference between your speakers and your  
headphones.  
Displayed range is –QdB, –81dB to +18dB.  
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is  
displayed.  
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value  
0 dB.  
Note  
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82Ref” will appear on the  
display and the THX indicator will flash.  
■ Muting Level  
`–QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB steps.  
This setting determines how much the output is muted when  
the muting function is used (➔ page 46).  
■ Maximum Volume  
`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)  
`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.  
To disable this setting, select “Off”.  
En-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
OSD Setup  
HDMI  
Hardware Setup  
■ On Screen Display  
`On  
■ HDMI Control(RIHD)  
`Off  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
`Off  
`On  
This preference determines whether operation details are  
displayed on-screen when an AV receiver function is  
adjusted.  
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be  
output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN.  
Main Menu  
Hardware Setup  
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible  
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the  
AV receiver (➔ page 92).  
Tuner  
Note  
■ AM/FM Frequency Step (North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
`10kHz/200kHz:  
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the names  
of connected p-compatible components and “RIHD On”  
are displayed on the AV receiver.  
■ Language  
(North American models)  
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,  
Nederlands, Svenska  
`9kHz/50kHz:  
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”  
Select the frequency step according to your area.  
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component,  
*
it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc. (“ ” shows up  
■ AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and  
Asian models)  
`10kHz:  
and indicates the number of components, when two or more are  
received).  
(European, Australian, Asian and Taiwanese  
models)  
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,  
Nederlands, Svenska, 中文  
This setting determines the language used for the on-screen  
menus.  
• When an p-compatible component is connected to the  
AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the connected  
component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example,  
while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player (being powered on) with the remote control of  
the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will  
be displayed on the AV receiver.  
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not  
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible  
or not.  
`9kHz:  
Select the frequency step according to your area.  
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify the  
AM/FM frequency step used in your area.  
■ Screen Saver  
`3min, 5min, 10min  
`Off  
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen saver  
activates itself. Once active, the screen saver will go off  
and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV  
receiver is operated in any way.  
Note  
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.  
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the setting to  
“Off”.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• When the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the  
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.  
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter standby  
mode as usual.)  
• The pcontrol does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use  
HDMI OUT MAIN instead.  
• When the source equipment is connected with the u  
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is  
set to “On”.  
En-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Operations  
■ Audio Return Channel (ARC)  
■ HDMI Through  
■ Audio TV Out  
`Off  
`Off  
`Off  
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, AUX,  
TV/CD, EXTRA1, EXTRA2:  
Selects the input source for which the HDMI  
Through function is enabled.  
`Last:  
`On  
`Auto:  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to  
HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.  
This preference determines whether the incoming audio  
signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to  
turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the  
HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a  
connected component through your TV’s speakers.  
Normally, this should be set to “Off”.  
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an ARC  
capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN  
of the AV receiver. To use this function, you must select  
the TV/CD input selector and your TV must be ARC  
capable. The ARC indicator will light when the audio  
signal is detected. Default setting: “- - - -”  
The HDMI Through function is activated on the input  
source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver  
to standby mode.  
Note  
When enabling the HDMI Through function, regardless of  
whether the AV receiver is on or in standby, both audio  
and video streams from an HDMI input will be output to  
the TV or other components via HDMI connection. The  
HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit in standby mode. Note  
that the indicator may not light under certain conditions  
(➔ page 51).  
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the  
above “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,  
resulting in automatic input source selection.  
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the  
AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this  
case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s display by  
pressing DISPLAY.  
• When “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is  
fixed to “Auto”.  
Note  
• This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI  
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.  
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI  
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.  
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio  
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be  
automatically switched to “ARC” (➔ page 62).  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even  
when this setting is set to “On”.  
• When “Audio TV Out” or “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to  
“On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers  
(➔ page 16), turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will  
make the sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and  
right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing  
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn  
down the AV receiver’s volume.  
After changing the settings of the “HDMI  
Control(RIHD)”, “HDMI Through” or “Audio  
Return Channel”, turn off the power on all connected  
pieces of equipment and then turn them on again. Refer  
to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of  
equipment.  
Note  
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via “HDMI Input”  
setting is enabled (➔ page 52).  
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the  
HDMI Through function; however in the following cases, the  
power consumption can be saved:  
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to  
“On” and the input source is not HDMI.  
– The TV is in standby mode.  
– You are watching a TV program.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input source  
may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.  
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI  
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.  
En-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
■ LipSync  
Auto Standby  
Network  
`Off  
■ Auto Standby  
`Off  
`On  
`On  
After modifying the network settings, you must confirm  
the changes by executing “Save”.  
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically  
correct any delay between the video and the audio, based  
on the data from the connected monitor.  
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the ASb indicator  
lights and the AV receiver will automatically enter standby  
mode if there is no operation for 30 minutes with no audio  
and no video signal input.  
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s display  
and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on.  
Default setting: On (European, Australian and Asian  
models), Off (North American and Taiwanese models)  
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s  
network settings manually.  
Note  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports  
HDMI Lip Sync.  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to  
change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set to  
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e.,  
DHCP is set to “Enable”). If, however, your router’s  
DHCP server is disabled (you’re for example using static  
IP), you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in  
which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is  
essential.  
■ InstaPrevue  
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home menu  
(➔ page 44) and specify the preview display of HDMI  
video streams.  
Note  
Sub Window  
`Multi:  
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.  
`Single:  
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.  
With this setting, you can set the number of preview  
thumbnails displayed.  
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself during  
playback with some sources.  
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is on.  
What’s DHCP?  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by  
routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to  
automatically configure themselves on a network.  
What’s DNS?  
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain  
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a  
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web  
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS  
to translate this into an IP address, in this case  
63.148.251.142.  
Position  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)  
`Top, Bottom, Left, Right  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)  
`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower Right  
With this setting, you can set the position of preview  
thumbnails on the TV screen.  
■ MAC Address  
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)  
address. This address cannot be changed.  
Note  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly  
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.  
■ DHCP  
`Enable  
`Disable  
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver  
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.  
To be continued  
En-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
■ Network Standby  
`On  
`Off  
This setting enables or disables control over the network.  
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit while  
the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that the indicator  
may not light under certain conditions (➔ page 51).  
Note  
Remote Controller Setup  
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP Address”,  
“Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server” settings  
yourself.  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
■ IP Address  
`Class A:  
“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”  
`Class B:  
Main Menu  
Remote Controller Setup  
Remote ID  
Note  
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly increases in  
standby mode.  
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”  
`Class C:  
■ Remote ID  
`1, 2, or 3  
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”  
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service  
Provider (ISP).  
■ Update Notice  
`Enable  
`Disable  
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a  
firmware update via network is available.  
When several Onkyo components are used in the same  
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate  
the AV receiver from other components, you can change  
its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
■ Subnet Mask  
Note  
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP  
(typically 255.255.255.0).  
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change  
the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you  
won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.  
Note  
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window will  
switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 20).  
• For details on the update notification, see “If the “Firmware  
■ Gateway  
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.  
Changing the remote controller’s ID  
Update Available” window appears.” (➔ page 20).  
■ DNS Server  
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold  
down Q SETUP until the remote indicator lights  
1
Initial Setup  
(about 3 seconds).  
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on  
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.  
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 21).  
■ Proxy URL  
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.  
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
2
■ Proxy Port  
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number  
here.  
Remote Mode Setup  
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”  
(➔ page 74).  
En-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
Lock Setup  
1
2
3
4
5
“Setup”  
Main Menu  
Lock Setup  
With this preference, you can protect your settings by  
locking the setup menus.  
■ Setup  
`Locked  
`Unlocked  
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be  
locked and you cannot change any setting.  
En-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Operations  
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an  
Additional Amplifier  
Multi Zone  
Main room  
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy  
playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,  
you can select a different source for each room.  
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main  
listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2/3.  
TV  
Main room  
AV receiver  
Making Multi Zone Connections  
TV  
There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers:  
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.  
2. Connect them to an additional amplifier.  
AV receiver  
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly  
to the AV receiver  
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main  
room and Zone 2. This is called Powered Zone, as the  
Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.  
R
L
Zone 2  
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone  
2 setting (➔ page 54).  
Zone 2  
IN  
R
L
Note  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2 is controlled by the AV  
receiver.  
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is  
reduced to 5.1 channels.  
Zone 3  
IN  
R
L
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
Note  
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.  
En-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
If your Zone 2 speakers are connected to a receiver or  
integrated amplifier in Zone 2, use its volume control to  
adjust the volume.  
Controlling Multi Zone Components  
8RECEIVER  
■ Operating on the AV receiver  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
Input selector buttons  
Muting Zone 2  
ZONE 2 ZONE 3  
MASTER VOLUME  
MUTING  
ZONE2  
■ Operating on the remote controller  
ZONE3  
VOLq/w  
Press ZONE2 followed by MUTING.  
1
Tip  
• To unmute, press ZONE2followed by MUTING again. Zone can  
also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.  
8ON/STANDBY  
Press ZONE2 or ZONE3, then point the remote  
controller at the AV receiver and press  
8RECEIVER.  
1
Note  
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,  
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input  
selector button within 8 seconds.  
1
2
• Only analog input sources are output from the ZONE 2/ZONE 3  
LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 2 L/R terminals. Digital input  
sources are not output. If no sound is heard when an input source  
is selected, verify that the source is connected to an analog input.  
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your  
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station will be  
heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM station  
for the main room, that station will also be output in Zone 2/3.  
• When you have selected NET or USB as input selector, the last  
selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2/3.  
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is selected, the  
power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.  
• While Zone 2/3 is on, ufunctions will not work.  
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone 2/3 is  
active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.  
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the  
AV receiver’s display.  
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the  
AV receiver’s display.  
To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press  
ZONE2 or ZONE3, followed by an INPUT  
SELECTOR button.  
2
3
To select the same source as the main room’s, press  
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Z2 Sel: Source” or “Z3  
Sel: Source” appears on the AV receiver’s display.  
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE2 or ZONE3,  
followed by 8RECEIVER.  
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3  
followed by 8ON/STANDBY within 8 seconds.  
The zone is turned off.  
The zone is turned off.  
Adjusting the Volume for Zone 2  
■ Operating on the remote controller  
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE2 or ZONE3  
on the remote controller first.  
■ Operating on the remote controller  
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode is set  
to Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian models) will  
automatically switch it to Direct.  
• “AUX”, “EXTRA1” and “EXTRA2” cannot be selected as input  
sources for Zone 2/3.  
• When “AUX”, “EXTRA1” or “EXTRA2” is the input source of  
Main room and Zone 2/3 is set to share the same source, no sound  
will be output from Zone 2/3.  
Press ZONE2.  
1
2
Use VOL q/w.  
■ Operating on the AV receiver  
Press ZONE 2 (the Z2 indicator on the AV  
receiver’s display flash).  
1
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds.  
2
En-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling Other Components  
Other Remote Operations  
You can use the remote controller that came with the AV  
receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions. The  
available functionality depends on the AV receiver.  
RI Dock  
iPod/iPhone Playback  
via Onkyo Dock  
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of your  
iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and videos of your  
iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the on-screen display  
(OSD) allows you to view, navigate, and select your  
iPod/iPhone model’s contents on your TV, and with the  
supplied remote controller, you can control your  
iPod/iPhone from the comfort of your sofa. You can even  
use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate your  
iPod/iPhone.  
Note  
Using the Onkyo Dock  
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,  
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.  
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI  
Dock.  
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are different  
depending on the region.  
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock  
components, see the Onkyo web site at:  
http://www.onkyo.com  
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update  
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available  
from the Apple web site.  
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the instruction  
manual of the Onkyo Dock.  
iPod Alarm  
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start  
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time  
and select your iPod as the input source automatically.  
Note  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV  
receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔ page 75).  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable  
(➔ page 18).  
Note  
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being played  
or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in sound (Beep).  
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which music  
files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ page 45).  
■ System Function  
■ Operating Notes  
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback  
volume.  
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its volume  
control has no effect.  
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone while  
it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set too loud  
before you reconnect your headphones.  
Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,  
some of the linked operations may not be available.  
System On  
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and  
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when RI  
Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can be  
turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.  
Auto Power On  
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback) while  
the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver will  
automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as the input  
source, and your iPod/iPhone will start playback.  
Direct Change  
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to another  
input source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to  
the input to which the RI Dock is connected.  
En-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Controlling Other Components  
■ uDock operation  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,  
you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock with the  
buttons described further in this section.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on  
entering a remote control code (➔ page 75).  
TOP MENU*1  
a
e 8SOURCE*2  
DISPLAY*3  
b q/w/e/r, ENTER  
f
MUTING  
PLAYLIST e/r  
g
e
f
ALBUM +/–  
c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
h
7, 6  
i VOL q/w  
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.  
REPEAT  
MENU  
MODE*4  
d
j
k
RANDOM  
RI Dock  
g
h
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,  
certain buttons may not work as expected.  
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the  
instruction manual of the RI Dock.  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
i
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control code  
(without u). In this case, make an uconnection and  
enter the remote control code 81993 (with u).  
*1  
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the  
DS-A2 RI Dock.  
a
b
j
*2  
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI  
Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not respond the  
first time you press this button, in which case you should press  
it again. This is because the remote controller transmits the On  
and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is  
already on, it will remain on when the remote controller  
transmits the On command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is  
already off, it will remain off when the remote controller  
transmits the Off command.  
■ With the RI Control  
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control code  
81993 (with u).  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”  
(➔ page 45).  
c
d
■ Without the RI Control  
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first  
(➔ page 76).  
*3  
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.  
Resume mode  
k
*4  
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the  
song that was playing when you removed your iPod/iPhone  
from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.  
En-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Controlling Other Components  
If you can control the component, use q/wto select  
“OK”, and then press ENTER.  
Looking up for Remote Control Codes  
Controlling Other  
Components  
9
You can look up for an appropriate remote control code  
from the on-screen menu.  
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote Mode  
Setup” front screen.  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control  
your other AV components. This section explains how to  
enter the remote control code for a component that you  
want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.  
Note  
If you cannot control the component, use q/wto  
select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.  
The next code is displayed.  
• This can only be carried out using the on-screen menu.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
Preprogrammed Remote Control  
Codes  
Use e/rto select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.  
2
3
Use q/wto select “Remote Controller Setup”, and  
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are  
preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling  
the components listed. You do not need to enter a remote  
control code to control these components.  
For details on controlling these components, see the  
indicated pages.  
then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select “Remote Mode Setup”, and then  
4
press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a remote mode, and then press  
5
ENTER.  
The menu of category selection appears.  
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 77)  
Use q/wto select a category, and then press  
TV/CD  
Onkyo CD player (➔ page 76)  
6
ENTER.  
STB/DVR Apple TV  
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.  
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then press  
7
ENTER.  
Repeat this step for the first three characters of the  
brand name.  
When you have entered the 3rd character, select  
“Search” and press ENTER.  
A list of brand names is retrieved.  
If the desired brand name is not found:  
Use rto select “Not Listed”, and then press  
ENTER.  
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.  
Use q/wto select a brand, and then press ENTER.  
8
A remote control code with its instructions are  
displayed. Follow the procedure.  
En-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Controlling Other Components  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
Remapping Colored Buttons  
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you  
want to control.  
You can change the configuration of colored buttons, with  
which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.  
Look up the appropriate remote control code in the  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button  
1
1
separate Remote Control Codes list.  
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD  
player, TV, etc.).  
that you want to program, press and hold down A  
(Red) until the remote indicator lights (about 3  
seconds).  
You can only change colored buttons for components  
whose codes belong to categories of the Remote  
Control Codes list (BD/DVD player, TV, cable set-top  
box, etc).  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to  
2
which you want to assign a code, press and hold  
down DISPLAY (about 3 seconds).  
The remote indicator lights.  
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons in the  
order that you want to reassign them.  
2
Note  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER  
and the multi zone button.  
The button presses are assigned to each button from  
left to right. The remote indicator flashes twice,  
indicating that the sequence has been successfully  
assigned. If the sequence is not successfully assigned,  
the remote indicator will flash once slowly.  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.  
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,  
remote control codes from any category can be assigned for  
the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also  
work as input selector buttons (➔ page 23), so choose a  
REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to  
which you connect your component. For example, if you  
connect your CD player to the CD input, choose TV/CD  
when entering its remote control code.  
Tip  
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings,  
see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons” (➔ page 76).  
Note  
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter  
the 5-digit remote control code.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered successfully,  
the remote indicator will flash once slowly.  
3
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the  
operation will be cancelled.  
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in  
Receiver mode or when ZONE 2/3 is active.  
Note  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time  
of release, they are subject to change.  
En-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling Other Components  
`70868:  
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo  
Controlling Other Components  
Onkyo MD recorder without u  
Components Connected via u  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your  
component, you can control your component as described  
below.  
For details on entering a remote control code for other  
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”  
(➔ page 75).  
`71323:  
Onkyo CD recorder without u  
Onkyo components that are connected via uare  
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV  
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control  
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.  
`82990:  
Onkyo Dock without u  
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons  
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with  
1
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default  
remote control code.  
an ucable and an analog audio cable (RCA).  
Controlling a TV  
See “Connecting Onkyo uComponents” for details  
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for  
(➔ page 18).  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button  
that you want to reset, press and hold down HOME  
until the remote indicator lights (about 3 seconds).  
1
*1  
controlling a TV that supports the p (limited to  
Enter the appropriate remote control code for a  
2
some models). The TV must be able to receive remote  
control commands via pand be connected to the  
AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via  
pdoesn’t work very well, program your TV’s  
remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode  
to control your TV.  
REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the  
previous section.  
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE  
button again.  
2
`42157:  
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that the  
button has been reset.  
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed  
with a remote control code. When a button is reset, its  
preprogrammed code is restored.  
`81993:  
Onkyo Dock with u  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`11807/13100/13500:  
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the  
remote controller at the AV receiver, and operate  
the component.  
3
TV with p  
Controlling Apple TV  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
Controlling Onkyo components without u  
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the  
remote controller directly at it, or you want to control an  
Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use the  
following remote control codes:  
`30627:  
By programming the supplied remote controller with the  
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.  
appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate  
your Apple TV.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`02615:  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold  
down HOME until the remote indicator lights  
(about 3 seconds).  
1
Apple TV  
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that the  
remote controller has been reset.  
Onkyo DVD player without u  
2
`71817:  
Onkyo CD player without u  
`32900/33100/33500:  
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player  
`32901/33104/33504:  
Onkyo HD DVD player  
En-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Controlling Other Components  
■ TV operation  
Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
By programming the supplied remote controller with the  
appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate  
your MHL-enabled mobile device.  
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX  
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the remote  
control code on the AUX button.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
`33101:  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w g  
Number: +10*1  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
GUIDE  
b
c q/w/e/r  
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
ENTER  
h
i
SETUP  
d
PREV CH  
RETURN  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
*1  
7, 6  
*1  
A (Red)  
f
MHL-enabled mobile device  
(European, Australian, and Asian models)  
`32910:  
*1  
B (Green)  
j
*1  
C (Yellow)  
*1  
D (Blue)  
a
b
MHL-enabled mobile device  
■ Blu-ray Disc player / HD DVD player operation  
k
l
Note  
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be  
guaranteed.  
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
b
h 8SOURCE  
c
d
DISPLAY  
c q/w/e/r  
i
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD  
DVD Player or DVD Recorder  
m
n
ENTER  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
j
k
SETUP  
d
DISC +/–  
MENU  
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
*1  
7, 6  
C (Yellow)  
D (Blue)  
e
f
for controlling a component that supports the p  
l
m
n
o
(limited to some models). The component must be able to  
receive remote control commands via pand be  
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`32910/33101/33501/31612:  
A (Red)  
RETURN  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
f
g
B (Green)  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
Number: +10*1  
g
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p  
o
*1  
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC system  
control function of the HDMI standard.  
En-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling Other Components  
■ DVD player / DVD recorder operation  
■ Satellite receiver / Cable receiver operation  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
Available buttons  
GUIDE  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
b
h 8SOURCE  
b
g
Number: +10  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
c q/w/e/r  
c q/w/e/r  
i
j
k
ENTER  
ENTER  
h 8SOURCE  
h
i
SETUP  
SETUP  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
d
d
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
DISC +/–  
MENU  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
7, 6  
l
m
n
o
*1  
RETURN  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
AUDIO  
A (Red)  
A (Red)  
f
g
f
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)  
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)  
D (Blue)  
*1  
j
*1  
D (Blue)  
CLR  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
■ CD player / CD recorder / MD recorder operation  
Number: +10*1  
k
l
Available buttons  
■ VCR/PVR operation  
b
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
c q/w/e/r  
g
ENTER  
Available buttons  
Number: +10  
c
d
GUIDE  
SETUP  
d
h 8SOURCE  
b
h 8SOURCE  
m
n
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
c q/w/e/r  
i
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
i
ENTER  
7, 6  
MUTING  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
j
k
l
m
o
j
SEARCH  
DISC +/–  
SETUP  
d
f
k
e
f
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
MODE  
CLR  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
CLR  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
o
7, 6  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
g
Number: +10  
Note  
■ Cassette tape deck operation  
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as  
expected, and some may not work at all.  
g
Available buttons  
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of  
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 73).  
e 1, t(Reverse  
Playback), 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
h 8SOURCE  
o
MUTING  
j
*1  
The pfunction is not supported. The p  
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control  
function of the HDMI standard.  
En-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Audio  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
Troubleshooting  
■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet  
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a  
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that the digital input source is selected  
properly.  
53  
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 15  
in all the way.  
Power  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the  
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it  
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press  
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV  
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode.  
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all  
components are connected properly.  
16-18  
13  
■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver  
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged  
into the wall outlet.  
—
—
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is  
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the  
metal part of each speaker terminal.  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five  
seconds or more, then plug it in again.  
Make sure that the input source is properly selected. 23  
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.  
13  
■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly  
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for  
home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,  
allowing precise adjustment.  
—
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby  
mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches.  
67  
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV  
receiver’s display, press the remote controller’s  
MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver.  
46  
■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the  
power, it turns off again  
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio  
presets and custom settings.  
While a pair of headphones is connected to the  
PHONES jack, no sound is output from the speakers.  
46  
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the 13  
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make  
sure that all speaker cables and input sources are  
properly connected, and leave the AV receiver with  
its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that,  
reconnect the power cord and turn the power on. If  
the AV receiver turns off again, unplug the power  
cord and contact your Onkyo dealer.  
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to  
an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output  
settings, and be sure to select a supported audio  
format.  
—
Remote indicator  
Check the digital audio output setting on the  
connected device. On some game consoles, such as  
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.  
—
RECEIVER  
Caution: If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, the speaker cables may be  
shorting.  
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio output format from a menu.  
—
—
—
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must  
connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.  
WARNING  
HOME  
If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV  
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are  
bent, twisted, or damaged.  
Not all listening modes use all speakers.  
37  
55  
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,  
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down  
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3  
seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.  
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the  
individual speaker levels.  
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not  
still connected.  
—
En-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix  
■ The front high and surround back speakers  
produce no sound  
■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required  
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. 63  
Set it to “Off”.  
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.  
64  
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound 38  
may be produced by the front high and surround back  
speakers. Select another listening mode.  
If the volume level of each individual speaker has  
been adjusted to high positive values, then the  
maximum master volume possible may be reduced.  
Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set  
automatically after the Audyssey 2EQ® Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup has been performed.  
34, 55  
■ Only the front speakers produce sound  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, 40  
only the front speakers and subwoofer produce  
sound.  
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the  
front high and surround back speakers may be weak.  
—
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
54  
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 57  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set  
to “Left / Right”.  
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main  
room is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high and  
surround back speakers produce no sound.  
—
■ Noise can be heard  
Check the Speaker Configuration.  
54  
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power  
cords, speaker cables, and the like may degrade the  
audio performance, so refrain from doing it.  
—
—
■ The subwoofer produces no sound  
■ Only the center speaker produces sound  
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
When you play source material that contains no  
information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer  
produces no sound.  
—
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro  
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game  
listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM  
radio station or mono TV program, the sound is  
concentrated in the center speaker.  
—
■ The Late Night function doesn’t work  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
54  
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital,  
Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD.  
49  
58  
In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker 57  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set  
to “Center”.  
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness  
Management” setting is not set to “On”. The Late  
Night function doesn’t work when this setting is  
disabled.  
Check the digital audio output setting on the  
connected device. On some game consoles, such as  
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.  
—
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
54  
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio output format from a menu.  
—
■ The surround speakers produce no sound  
■ About DTS signals  
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or  
Mono listening mode is selected, the surround  
speakers produce no sound.  
—
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes 37-43  
cannot be selected.  
When DTS program material ends and the DTS  
bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS  
listening mode and the dts indicator remains on. This  
is to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast  
forward, or fast reverse function on your player. If  
you switch your player from DTS to PCM, you may  
not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not  
switch formats immediately. In such case, you should  
stop your player for about three seconds and then  
resume playback.  
—
Depending on the source and current listening mode, 37  
not much sound may be produced by the surround  
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.  
■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode  
(European, Australian and Asian models) The  
Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected while  
Zone 2/3 is on.  
—
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
54  
■ The center speaker produces no sound  
■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,  
the center speaker produces no sound.  
—
If no surround back speakers and front high speakers  
are connected, or the Zone 2 speakers are being used,  
6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.  
—
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 57  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set  
to “Left / Right”.  
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is 37-43  
not always possible to select all of the listening  
modes.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
54  
En-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to  
playback DTS material properly even though your  
player is connected to a digital input on the AV  
receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream  
has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,  
or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver  
doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such  
cases, you may hear noise.  
—
—
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector, and  
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s).  
16, 52  
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or  
computer.  
—
Listen to the station in mono.  
31  
(European, Australian and Asian models) While  
the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the video  
circuitry is turned off and only video signals input  
through HDMI IN can be output.  
37  
When listening to an AM station, operating the  
remote controller may cause noise.  
—
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
—
—
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
—
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast  
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may  
produce a short audible noise. This is not a  
malfunction.  
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
—
■ There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
Remote Controller  
■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is 94  
not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC  
are not guaranteed.  
■ The remote controller doesn’t work  
Before operating this unit, be sure to press  
RECEIVER.  
—
5
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an  
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio  
signals, audio output may not start immediately.  
—
When the resolution is set to any resolution not  
supported by the TV, no video is output from the  
HDMI outputs.  
52  
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the  
correct polarity.  
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the  
AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV  
does not support the current video resolution and you  
need to select another resolution on your DVD  
player.  
—
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of  
batteries, or old and new batteries.  
5
■ There’s no sound during Whole House Mode  
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio input.  
53  
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far  
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no  
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV  
receiver’s remote control sensor.  
5
Video  
■ The on-screen menus don’t appear  
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to  
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.  
Relocate if necessary.  
—
—
■ There’s no picture  
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
—
—
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 15  
in all the way.  
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet  
with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may  
not work reliably when the doors are closed.  
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via  
HDMI OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not  
displayed.  
Make sure that each video component is properly  
connected.  
16, 17  
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select 52  
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch  
composite video, and component video sources.  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote  
controller mode.  
11, 76  
■ The on-screen display does not appear  
When using the remote controller to control other  
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may  
not work as expected.  
—
Depending on the input signal, the on screen display 47  
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN  
is output to a device connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
If the video source is connected to a component video 17, 53  
input, you must assign that input to an input selector,  
and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI  
output(s) or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.  
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control 75  
code.  
If the video source is connected to a composite video 17  
input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI  
output(s) or the corresponding composite video  
output.  
Tuner  
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 68  
and remote controller.  
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,  
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light  
Relocate your antenna.  
—
En-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
■ The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound  
■ Can’t control other components  
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or  
the AV receiver.  
—
—
18  
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type 54  
(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp”.  
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u  
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.  
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.  
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output  
video.  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote  
controller mode.  
11, 76  
Music Server and Internet Radio  
■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t  
control my iPod/iPhone  
■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio  
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the  
TV/CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or  
GAME IN jacks, for the remote controller to work  
properly, you must set the input display  
appropriately.  
45  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in  
the Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not  
connect properly to the Dock. Always remove your  
iPod/iPhone from the case before inserting it into the  
Dock.  
—
Check the network connection between the AV  
receiver and your router or switch.  
95  
—
96  
67  
Make sure that your modem and router are properly  
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.  
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the  
appropriate remote control code.  
74  
Make sure the server is up and running and  
compatible with the AV receiver.  
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s  
displaying the Apple logo.  
—
To control another manufacturer’s component, point 75  
the remote controller at that component.  
Check the “Network”settings.  
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.  
73  
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via 76  
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver.  
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code  
first.  
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller,  
point it toward your AV receiver.  
—
■ Playback stops while listening to music files on  
the server  
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start  
playback by pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play  
button. Remote operation should then be possible.  
—
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV  
receiver.  
96  
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected 76  
via u, point the remote controller at the component.  
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code  
first.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
—
—
If you download or copy large files on your  
computer, playback may be interrupted. Try closing  
any unused programs, use a more powerful computer,  
or use a dedicated server.  
—
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may  
not work as expected.  
The entered remote control code may not be correct.  
If more than one code is listed, try each one.  
—
If the server is serving large music files to several  
networked devices simultaneously, the network may  
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.  
Reduce the number of playback devices on the  
network, upgrade your network, or use a switch  
instead of a hub.  
—
■ The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my  
iPod/iPhone as the input source  
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone  
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting  
a different input source. If playback is not paused, the  
Direct Change function may select your iPod/iPhone  
as the input source by mistake during the transition  
between tracks.  
—
■ There’s no sound  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.  
—
—
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in  
the Dock.  
■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web  
browser  
■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly  
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct  
input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.  
—
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always  
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if  
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet  
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on  
the “Network” screen.  
67  
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.  
—
—
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
—
—
Zone 2/3  
■ There’s no video  
Check the “Network” settings.  
67  
■ There’s no sound  
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT  
setting is set to On.  
—
Only components connected to analog inputs can be  
played in Zone 2/3.  
En-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
■ The display doesn’t work  
To turn the setting off, repeat the above process so that  
“Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display, and release the buttons.  
• Video Attenuation  
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, CBL/SAT,  
STB/DVR, GAME or USB input.  
If you have a game console connected to the composite  
video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can  
attenuate the gain.  
Video ATT :Off: (default).  
Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.  
USB Device Playback  
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) listening  
mode is selected.  
—
■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device  
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.  
—
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support 96  
the USB mass storage device class. However,  
playback may not be possible with some USB devices  
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device  
class.  
■ How do I change the language of a multiplex  
source  
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust” 57  
menu to select “Main” or “Sub”.  
USB memory devices with security functions cannot  
be played.  
—
■ The ufunctions don’t work  
18  
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an  
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to  
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the  
DeepColor function off  
Others  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the  
component and AV receiver, even if they are  
connected digitally.  
■ Standby power consumption  
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously  
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on  
the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR, press  
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on  
the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.  
To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the above  
process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display and release the buttons.  
In the following cases, the power consumption in  
65, 66,  
18  
While Zone 2/3 is selected, the ufunctions don’t  
standby mode may reach up to a maximum of 8.3 W: 68  
– The “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to  
“On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV  
receiver will enter standby mode as usual.)  
– The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than  
“Off”.  
work.  
■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and  
Direct Change don’t work for components  
connected via u  
– The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.  
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned 18  
If an MHL-enabled mobile device is connected to the 16  
AUX (front) input, the power consumption in standby  
mode will increase.  
on.  
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal  
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,  
severe interference, noise from an external source, or  
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely  
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it  
back in.  
■ When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,  
the measurement fails and the message  
“Ambient noise is too high.” is displayed.  
■ The sound changes when I connect my  
headphones  
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker  
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.  
—
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian  
and Asian models).  
—
■ The following settings can be made for the  
composite video inputs  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental  
fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit’s  
malfunction. Before you record important data, make  
sure that the material will be recorded correctly.  
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these  
settings.  
■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required  
The values entered may be automatically adjusted  
with values best-suited for your home theater.  
—
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the input  
source that you want to set and the SETUP button  
simultaneously. While holding down the input selector  
button, press SETUP until “Video ATT :On” appears  
on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.  
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall  
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.  
En-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Important Note Regarding Video Playback  
The AV receiver can upconvert component video and  
composite video sources for display on a TV connected to  
the HDMI output(s). However, if the picture quality of the  
source is poor, upconversion may make the picture worse  
or disappear altogether.  
In this case, try the following:  
If the video source is connected to a component  
video input, connect your TV to COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT.  
1
If the video source is connected to a composite video  
input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V.  
On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,  
and then select “Component Video Input”  
2
(➔ page 53).  
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN, select the relevant input selector, and  
assign it to “IN1”.  
If the video source is connected to a composite video  
input, select the relevant input selector, and assign it to  
“- - - - -”.  
Tip  
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to  
“Direct” (➔ page 61).  
En-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Updating the Firmware via Network  
Limitation of liability  
Firmware Update  
The program and accompanying online documentation  
are furnished to you for use at your own risk. Onkyo will  
not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages  
for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your  
use of the program or the accompanying online  
documentation, regardless of legal theory, and whether  
arising in tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be  
liable to you or any third party for any special, indirect,  
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,  
including, but not limited to, compensation,  
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using  
network connection on the rear panel.  
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can choose  
from the following two methods: update via network, or  
update via USB storage. Choose the one that best suits  
your environment. Before proceeding with the update,  
please read the corresponding explanations carefully.  
Note  
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an  
Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver.  
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being  
updated.  
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the  
update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it  
is being updated.  
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.  
• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is  
finished.  
■ Update via network  
You need a wired Internet connection to update the  
firmware.  
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 87)  
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash  
memory stick. You need at least 32 MB of available  
space to update the firmware.  
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of  
present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for any  
other reason whatsoever.  
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.  
Note  
• Check the network connection before updating.  
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver  
during the update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it  
is being updated.  
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being  
updated.  
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.  
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated as an  
independent device.  
Before Starting  
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(➔ page 65).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet  
cable.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,  
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver may take  
a while to read it.  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes  
the ability to power them.  
To be continued  
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage  
of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV  
receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your important  
music files beforehand.  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port, Onkyo  
recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported.  
Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.  
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.  
En-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Update Procedure  
Troubleshooting  
Case 3:  
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect  
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.  
Case 1:  
Press RECEIVERfollowed by HOMEon the remote  
controller.  
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
If “No Update” is displayed on the AV receiver’s display,  
it means that the firmware has already been updated. You  
do not need to do anything further.  
1
Case 4:  
If an error occurs due to a wrong selection of input sources,  
turn off and on the AV receiver. Then retry the update.  
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.  
2
Case 2:  
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is  
turned on. Please wait until it becomes operable.  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front  
display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following  
table and take appropriate action.  
Case 5:  
If you do not have an Internet connection to the network,  
please contact Onkyo Support (➔ page 88).  
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.  
3
4
■ Errors during an update via network  
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
Error Code  
Description  
*
*-10, -20  
The Ethernet cable was not detected.  
Reconnect the cable properly.  
During the update process, the on-screen display may  
disappear depending on the updated program. When  
this occurs, you can still view the update progress on  
the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will  
reappear after the update is complete, and upon  
turning the AV receiver off and on again.  
*
*
*-11, -13, -21, Internet connection error.  
*-28  
Check the following items:  
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,  
gateway address, and DNS server are  
configured properly.  
• Make sure the router is turned on.  
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router are  
connected with an Ethernet cable.  
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has  
been completed.  
5
• Make sure your router is configured properly.  
See the instruction manual of the router.  
• If your network allows only one client  
connection and there is any other device  
already connected, the AV receiver will not be  
able to access the network. Consult your  
Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
• If your modem does not function as a router,  
you will need a router. Depending on your  
network, you may need to configure the proxy  
server if necessary. See the document  
provided by your ISP. If you are still unable to  
access the Internet, the DNS or proxy server  
may be temporarily down. Contact your ISP.  
Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on  
6
the front panel.  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.  
Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically  
turn on again.  
Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware  
installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the beginning.  
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo  
Support (➔ page 88) and provide the error  
code.  
En-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Update Procedure  
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
Updating the Firmware via USB  
10  
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a  
USB device.  
During the update process, the on-screen display may  
disappear depending on the updated program. When  
this occurs, you can still view the update progress on  
the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will  
reappear after the update is complete, and upon  
turning the AV receiver off and on again.  
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is any  
data in the USB device, remove it first.  
1
Note  
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web  
site. The file name is as follows:  
2
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update  
process.  
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the  
update process.  
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware  
file or the AC power cord during the update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it  
is being updated.  
• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is  
finished.  
ONKAVR****_************.zip  
Unzip the downloaded file. The following three files  
are created:  
ONKAVR****_************.of1  
ONKAVR****_************.of2  
ONKAVR****_************.of3  
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not remove the  
USB device during the update process.  
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has  
been completed.  
11  
12  
Remove the USB device.  
Copy the extracted files to the USB device. Be  
careful not to copy the zip file.  
3
Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on  
Remove the USB device from your PC and connect  
the front panel.  
4
Before Starting  
it to the USB port on the AV receiver.  
When the AV receiver has two USB ports, you can  
use either one.  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.  
Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically  
turn on again.  
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(➔ page 65).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet  
cable.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,  
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.  
Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware  
installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on.  
5
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press  
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the  
front display.  
Select the USB input source.  
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.  
6
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display and then the name of the USB device is  
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize the  
USB device.  
Press RECEIVERfollowed by HOMEon the remote  
controller.  
7
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.  
8
9
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.  
En-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
Case 1:  
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
http://www.onkyo.com/  
If “No Update” is displayed on the AV receiver’s display,  
it means that the firmware has already been updated. You  
do not need to do anything further.  
The Americas  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:  
Tel: 201-785-2600  
Fax: 201-785-2650  
Hours:M-F 9am-5pm ET  
Case 2:  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front  
display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following  
table and take appropriate action.  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
For Product Support Team Only:  
1-800-229-1687  
■ Errors during an update via USB  
Hours:M-F 9am-8pm / Sat-Sun 10am-8pm ET  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
Error Code  
Description  
*
*-10, -20  
The USB device was not detected. Make sure  
the USB flash memory or USB cable is  
properly connected to the USB port. If the USB  
storage device has its own power supply, use it  
to power the USB device.  
Europe  
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY  
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213  
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/  
*-14  
The firmware file was not found in the root  
folder of the USB device, or the firmware file is  
for another model. Retry and download the file  
on the support page of the web site, following  
the on-site instructions. If the error persists,  
please contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
China, Hong Kong  
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim  
Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.  
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039  
http://www.onkyochina.com  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the beginning.  
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo  
Support and provide the error code.  
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa  
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo  
SUPPORT site.  
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/firmware/index.html  
Case 3:  
The above-mentioned information is subject to change  
without prior notice. Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest  
update.  
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect  
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.  
Case 4:  
If an error occurs due to a wrong selection of input sources,  
turn off and on the AV receiver. Then retry the update.  
En-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
of 480i/576i are output and the resolution remains the same. If  
your TV doesn’t support this resolution, there will be no picture  
(➔ page 91).  
Video Connection Formats  
Connection Tips and  
Video Signal Path  
Video components can be connected by using any one of  
the following video connection formats: composite video,  
component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best  
picture quality.  
■ “Monitor Out” set to “Both”  
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for  
compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The  
format you choose will depend on the formats supported by  
your components. Use the following sections as a guide.  
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as  
shown, with composite video and component video  
sources all being upconverted for both HDMI outputs. Use  
this setting if you connect both HDMI OUT MAIN and  
HDMI OUT SUB of the AV receiver to your TV.  
Note that video signals are output from both HDMI outputs  
at the resolution supported by both TVs.  
Tip  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video  
signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g.,  
component video input passing through to component video  
output).  
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to  
“Direct” (➔ page 61).  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
The composite video and component video outputs pass  
through their respective input signals as they are.  
■ “Monitor Out” set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI  
Sub”  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as  
shown, with composite video and component video  
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output. Use  
these settings if you connect either HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB of the AV receiver to your TV.  
The composite video and component video outputs pass  
through their respective input signals as they are.  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
Component  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
TV, projector, etc.  
Composite  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Note  
IN  
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the “Resolution” setting  
cannot be selected.  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Component  
TV, projector, etc.  
Note  
• When composite video and component video sources are  
upconverted for HDMI OUT SUB, only signals with a resolution  
En-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
■ Signal Selection  
Audio Connection Formats  
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will  
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:  
HDMI, component video, composite video.  
However, for component video only, regardless of whether  
a component video signal is actually present, if a  
component video input is assigned to the input selector,  
that component video input will be selected. And if no  
component video input is assigned to the input selector,  
this will be interpreted as no component video signal being  
present.  
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video  
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video  
inputs. However, the HDMI signal is automatically  
selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI  
outputs.  
Audio components can be connected by using any of the  
following audio connection formats: analog, optical,  
coaxial, or HDMI.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the  
AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for  
analog line outputs and vice versa.  
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will  
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:  
HDMI, digital, analog.  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Analog  
Optical  
Coaxial  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Signal Selection Example  
IN  
*1  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
*1  
*1  
AV receiver  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
MONITOR OUT  
IN  
AV receiver  
*1  
*2  
TV, projector, etc.  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
Component  
*1  
*2  
Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔ page 66).  
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to  
“Auto” (➔ page 66), the TV/CD input selector is selected,  
and your TV is ARC capable.  
TV, projector, etc.  
Tip  
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input  
selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the case of an  
optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL indicator lights. In  
the case of an analog connection, neither of the HDMI and  
DIGITAL indicators light.  
En-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
Video Resolution Chart  
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.  
NTSC/PAL  
✔: Output available  
Output  
HDMI  
4K*1  
✔
Component  
Composite  
480i/576i  
s
Input  
HDMI  
1080p/24 1080p  
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p 480i/576i  
1080p  
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p 480i/576i  
*2  
✔
1080p/24  
1080p  
*2  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2  
1080i  
✔
✔
✔
*2  
720p  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
1080p  
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2  
✔
✔
✔
Component  
Composite  
✔
1080i  
✔
720p  
✔
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
480i/576i  
✔
*2  
*2  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1  
*2  
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 24/25/30 Hz], [4096 × 2160 24 Hz]  
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.  
En-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
Operations that can be performed with  
Using an RIHD-  
compatible TV, Player,  
or Recorder  
p, which stands for Remote Interactive over  
HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on  
Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with  
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows  
system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI  
standard. CEC provides interoperability between various  
components, however, operation with components other  
than p-compatible components cannot be  
guaranteed.  
About p-compatible components  
■ TV  
• Toshiba TV  
• Sharp TV  
pconnection  
The following components are p-compatible (As  
■ For p-compatible TV  
of January 2012).  
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting  
the AV receiver to an p-compatible TV.  
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is  
set to standby.  
■ Players/Recorders  
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output  
the audio from the speakers connected to the AV  
receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.  
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players  
• Toshiba players and recorders  
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or  
auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV  
receiver. (A connection such as an optical digital cable or  
similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable.)  
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote  
controller of the TV.  
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used together  
with Sharp TV)  
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some  
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the  
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.  
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the  
AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller  
of the TV.  
Note  
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more p-  
compatible components than the quantities specified below, to  
the HDMI input terminal.  
■ For p-compatible players/recorders  
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting  
the AV receiver to an p-compatible  
player/recorder.  
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.  
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up to  
three.  
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV  
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the  
player/recorder that is playing back.  
– Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.  
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV  
amplifier via HDMI.  
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more  
p-compatible components than the above-mentioned  
quantities are connected.  
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using the  
remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.  
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be  
available.  
To be continued  
En-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
■ How to connect and setup  
Change each item in the “HDMI” menu according  
to the following settings:  
• HDMI Control(RIHD): On  
• Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto  
See details of each setting (➔ pages 65, 66).  
Operate with the remote controller.  
For buttons that can be operated (➔ page 77).  
2
3
4
Confirm the connection and settings.  
1. Connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack to the HDMI  
1
Note  
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output  
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio  
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the  
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending  
on the player models.)  
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio  
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV  
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on  
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-  
do the corresponding operations on the TV.  
input jack of the TV.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Confirm the settings.  
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.  
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the  
power of the connected components is turned off  
automatically with the link operation.  
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder.  
HDMI  
connection  
AV receiver  
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio  
control compatible components, do not connect the u  
cable at the same time.  
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder, and verify the following:  
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and  
selects the input to which the Blu-ray  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
connection  
(OPTICAL)  
HDMI  
connection  
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI  
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the  
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.  
Disc/DVD player/recorder is connected.  
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the  
input to which the AV receiver is connected.  
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,  
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu  
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is  
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from  
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.  
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV  
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and  
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers  
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the  
TV speakers.  
TV, projector, etc.  
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction  
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV  
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or  
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It  
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to  
output audio from the TV.  
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work  
depending on the component model connected. In such  
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.  
2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the  
OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an  
optical digital cable.  
Note  
• When the audio return channel (ARC) function is used with  
an ARC capable TV, this connection is not necessary  
(➔ page 66).  
3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack  
of the AV receiver.  
Note  
Note  
• It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting  
the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks  
(➔ page 52). Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD  
selector at this time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer  
Electronics Control) operation will not be guaranteed.  
• Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver  
for the first time, when the settings of each component are  
changed, when the main power of each component is turned  
off, when the power cable is disconnected from the power  
supply, or when there has been a power outage.  
En-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Supported Audio Formats  
About Copyright Protection  
About HDMI  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit)  
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,  
DTS-HD Master Audio)  
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV,  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new  
digital interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors,  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video  
components. Until now, several separate video and audio  
cables have been required to connect AV components.  
With HDMI, a single cable can carry control signals,  
digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-  
channel PCM, multichannel digital audio, and  
*2  
Content Protection) , a copy-protection system for digital  
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver  
via HDMI must also support HDCP.  
*1  
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface  
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support HDMI  
output of the above audio formats.  
*3  
standard set by the DDWG in 1999.  
*2  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The  
video encryption technology developed by Intel for  
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and requires  
a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.  
multichannel PCM).  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible  
with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so TVs and displays  
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-  
DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and  
displays, resulting in no picture.)  
*1  
*3  
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,  
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon  
Image, this open industry group’s objective is to address the  
industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification  
for high-performance PCs and digital displays.  
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
*2  
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible  
components can display the picture.  
Note  
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual  
Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be  
connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that  
DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a  
separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with  
such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from  
a PC are not supported.  
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be  
restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is  
poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI,  
check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction  
manual for details.  
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the  
following:  
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip  
Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DSD and Multichannel PCM.  
En-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix  
Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet  
connection.  
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings  
automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually,  
see “Network” (➔ page 67).  
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have  
a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoE-  
compatible router.  
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server  
to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a  
proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver  
(➔ page 68).  
Network Requirements  
Network/USB Features  
■ Ethernet Network  
Connecting to the Network  
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet  
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play  
music on a computer that’s connected to the network  
wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it is  
recommended to use wired connections.  
The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV  
receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s  
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port  
100Base-TX switch built-in.  
■ Ethernet Router  
Internet radio  
A router manages the network, data-routing and supplying  
of IP addresses. Your router must support the following:  
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows  
several networked computers to access the Internet  
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV  
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.  
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP  
supplies IP addresses to the network devices, allowing  
them to configure themselves automatically.  
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is  
recommended.  
Modem  
Router  
WAN  
LAN  
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some Internet  
Service Providers (ISP) require you to use specific routers.  
Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re  
unsure.  
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable  
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to  
connect the AV receiver to your home network.  
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)  
Computer or media server  
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have  
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,  
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results,  
so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g.,  
cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP  
or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
Note  
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband  
Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web.  
En-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
Minimum system requirements for Windows Media  
Player 11 on Windows XP  
Operating system  
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP  
Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition  
(SP2), Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center  
Edition 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup  
for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)  
Server Requirements  
USB Device Requirements  
■ Server playback  
• USB mass storage device class (but not always  
guaranteed).  
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.  
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section  
will be treated as an independent device.  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may  
be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not  
supported.  
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a  
computer or media server and supports the following  
technologies:  
• Windows Media Player 11  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• Windows Media Connect 2.0  
• DLNA-certified media server  
Processor:  
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced  
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.  
If the operating system of your computer is Windows  
Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.  
Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be  
downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site.  
• The computer or media server must be on the same  
network as the AV receiver.  
Memory:  
Hard disk:  
Drive:  
64 MB  
Note  
200 MB of free space  
CD or DVD drive  
28.8 kbps  
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No  
Storage” will be displayed.  
Modem:  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB  
port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it.  
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the  
USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB devices to  
be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or  
software. Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB  
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer to your USB MP3 player’s  
instruction manual for details.  
Sound card:  
Monitor:  
Video card:  
Software:  
16-bit sound card  
Super VGA (800 x 600)  
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may  
be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when  
using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket  
PC or smartphone)  
Note  
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not  
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.  
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played.  
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used  
with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back up your  
important music files beforehand.  
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special  
music software are not supported.  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes  
the ability to power them.  
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB device  
must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver make  
take a while to read it.  
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or  
Netscape 7.1  
■ Remote playback  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller device.  
The setting varies depending on the media server or  
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction  
manual for details.  
If the operating system of your personal computer is  
Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed.  
For more information, see the Microsoft web site.  
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.  
En-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)  
Supported Audio File Formats  
About DLNA  
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,  
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
For server playback and playback from a USB device, the  
AV receiver supports the following music file formats.  
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,  
playback times may not display correctly.  
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,  
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop a  
concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks  
where digital content such as photos, music, and videos can  
be shared through consumer electronics, personal  
computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home.  
The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines version 1.5.  
Note  
■ AAC  
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the  
following music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis.  
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file formats  
may not be played depending on the server type.  
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/  
.3GP or .3G2)  
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,  
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and  
320 kbps are supported.  
■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)  
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3  
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,  
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps.  
Incompatible files cannot be played.  
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)  
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,  
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)  
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio  
compression technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by  
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)  
®
using Windows Media Player.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and  
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported.  
Incompatible files cannot be played.  
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, bitrates of  
between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA DRM are  
supported.  
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)  
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,  
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,  
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)  
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz  
are supported.  
*
Only for playback via network.  
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit  
En-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
License and Trademark  
Information  
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may  
be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc.  
U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey 2EQ®,  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and  
Audyssey DSX® are registered trademarks of  
Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.  
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
THX Select2 Plus  
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2  
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the  
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the  
Home Theater products you purchase will give you  
superb performance for many years to come. THX  
Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds of parameters,  
including power amplifier performance, and pre-  
amplifier performance and operation for both digital and  
analog domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature  
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which  
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater  
playback.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;  
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;  
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued  
& pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol  
together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a  
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc.  
All Rights Reserved.  
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are  
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital  
Living Network Alliance.”  
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft  
group of companies.  
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates.  
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX  
Ltd.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,  
Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.  
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are  
trademark or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United  
States and other counties.”  
“HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.”  
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and  
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.  
and other countries.  
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic  
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or  
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to  
meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for  
the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United States  
and other countries.  
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone  
may affect wireless performance.  
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
En-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
■ HDMI  
Video Section  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
Input  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,  
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance  
AUX INPUT  
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB  
1080p  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)  
Output  
Video Resolution  
Audio Format  
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)  
Component Video Frequency Response  
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB  
Rated Output Power  
All channels:  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,  
DVD-Audio, DSD  
(North American)  
100 watts minimum continuous power per  
channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels driven  
from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a maximum  
total harmonic distortion of 0.08% (FTC)  
115 watts minimum continuous power per  
channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels driven at  
1 kHz, with a maximum total harmonic  
distortion of 0.7% (FTC)  
Supported  
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD)  
Tuner Section  
■ Video Inputs  
FM Tuning Frequency Range  
Component  
Composite  
IN  
(North American) 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME,  
USB  
(Taiwanese) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz  
(Others)  
(Others) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS  
7 ch × 160 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven  
of 1% (IEC)  
AM Tuning Frequency Range  
■ Video Outputs  
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz  
40  
Maximum Effective Output Power  
(Asian)  
Preset Channel  
Component  
Composite  
OUT  
7 ch × 175 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven  
(JEITA)  
MONITOR OUT  
General  
■ Audio Inputs  
Digital  
*
Dynamic Power  
*
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power  
Power Supply  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
(European and Australian)  
AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
Optical: 2  
Coaxial: 2  
240 W (3 Ω, Front)  
210 W (4 Ω, Front)  
120 W (8 Ω, Front)  
Analog  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME,  
PC, TV/CD  
(Others) AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz  
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)  
Power Consumption (North American and Taiwanese) 6.3 A  
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)  
■ Audio Outputs  
(Others) 620 W  
Damping Factor  
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)  
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)  
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)  
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance  
200 mV/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)  
No-sound Power Consumption  
Analog  
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT  
2
(North American and Taiwanese) 85 W  
(European and Australian) 80 W  
(Others)  
80 W (230 V)  
85 W (240 V)  
Speaker Outputs  
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL/FHL,  
SBR/FHR) + ZONE2 (L, R)  
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance  
Stand-by Power Consumption  
Phones  
1 (6.3 ø)  
2 V/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)  
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (DSP bypass)  
Tone Control Characteristics  
(North American and Taiwanese) 0.15 W  
(Others) 0.2 W  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
■ Others  
10 dB, 30 Hz (BASS)  
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)  
Setup Mic  
RI  
USB  
1
435 mm × 173.5 mm × 328 mm  
17-1/8" × 6-13/16" × 12-15/16"  
1
Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
1 (Front)/1 (Rear)  
1
Weight  
11.0 kg (24.3 lbs.)  
Speaker Impedance  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
6 Ω - 16 Ω  
(Others) 4 Ω - 16 Ω  
Ethernet  
Specifications and features are subject to change  
without notice.  
En-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163  
http://www.onkyo.com/  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY  
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213  
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/  
The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK  
Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700  
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.  
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039  
http://www.onkyochina.com/  
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJin Road, Jin an, Shanghai,  
China 200041, Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396  
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/  
Y1203-2  
SN 29401019EN-A  
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 0 1 9 E N - A *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
®
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
Pandora internet radio –Getting Started  
(U.S. only) ................................................. 2  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which  
means you can freely switch between several logins.  
After registering user accounts, login is performed from  
the “Users” screen.  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3  
Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Note  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio (North  
American only) .........................................4  
Remove this user:  
You can either store a new user account, or delete  
an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
A list of the network services appears, and the NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet  
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 5  
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6  
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7  
Tip  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® internet radio  
–Getting Started (U.S. only)  
To play a station, use q/wto select the station from  
your station list, and then press ENTER.  
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.  
Create a New Station:  
Enter the name of a song, artist, or genre and Pandora  
will create a unique radio station for you based on the  
musical qualities of that song, artist, or genre.  
2
This will permanently delete a station from your  
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback will be  
lost should you choose to re-create the station with the  
same song or artist.  
Create station from this song:  
Creates a radio station from this song.  
Rename this station:  
Lets you rename the current radio station.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your  
profile on www.pandora.com.  
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service that  
plays the music you know and helps you discover music  
you’ll love.  
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account” or  
1
■ Menu Items  
I like this song:  
Give a song “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play more  
music like it.  
I don’t like this song:  
Give a song “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban that  
song from the current station.  
Why is this song playing?:  
Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora  
uses to create your personal radio stations.  
Don’t play the song for a month:  
If you are tired of a song, you can put the song to sleep  
and Pandora will not play it for one month.  
Create station from this artist:  
Creates a radio station from this artist.  
“I’m new to Pandora” and then press ENTER.  
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to  
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on your  
TV screen. Please write down this code. Go to an  
Internet connected computer and point your browser  
to www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Bookmark this song:  
Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow  
you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one  
step!  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Enter your activation code and then follow the  
instructions to create your Pandora account and your  
personalized Pandora Internet radio stations. You can  
create your stations by entering your favorite songs  
and artists when prompted. After you have created  
your account and stations you can return to your  
Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to  
your personalized Pandora Internet radio.  
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can add  
your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by  
selecting “I have a Pandora Account” and logging in  
with your email and password.  
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora trade  
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora  
Media, Inc. Used with permission.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press ENTER.  
Search:  
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER or  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)  
2
3
1to start playback.  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account” and then  
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track.  
Music Guide:  
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
1
press ENTER.  
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you don’t  
have one yet, you can create a new account at  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists, Top  
Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and Staff Picks.  
Rhapsody Channels:  
Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody’s  
top-notch editors.  
Playlists:  
Play your own personal playlists.  
My Library:  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,  
RANDOM, REPEAT  
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select  
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.  
Enter your user name (usually your email) and  
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web  
Setup.  
Note  
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t work.  
■ Menu Items  
Add track to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.  
Add album to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing albums.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio  
channels.  
■ Using the keyboard screen  
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the  
Rhapsody catalog using My Library.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select “OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.  
4. Press ENTER.  
Tip  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites list.  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
Tip  
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and Rhapsody  
Channels from My Library.  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press ENTER.  
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can sign  
in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user name and  
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web  
Setup. If you don’t know your username or password,  
call Sirius XM at (888) 539-7474 for assistance.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(North American only)  
1
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately  
and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions (see  
www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this agreement before  
you purchase your subscription. Sirius, XM and all related  
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.  
and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.  
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of SiriusXM  
Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen shows how  
many days are left in your trial. After the trial period  
expires, if you want to continue listening to the service,  
you must subscribe. To subscribe go to  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your computer.  
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a username  
and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver.  
■ Using the keyboard screen  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select “OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your AV  
receiver connected to the Internet. Using the remote  
control, follow these steps:  
4. Press ENTER.  
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM  
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays the  
category available for selection.  
Use q/wto select the category and then press  
2
3
ENTER.  
The channel list screen for the selected category  
appears.  
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then press  
ENTER.  
The playback screen for the selected channel appears  
and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6  
■ Menu Items  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and  
then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a  
free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs  
you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,  
you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,  
share them with friends and see what they like, too.  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign  
in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in the  
next keyboard screen.  
It signs out from your account.  
■ Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER or 1  
to start playback.  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your user  
3
name and password.  
2. Select “OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless  
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a  
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm  
account today at www.last.fm/join  
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.  
■ Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
4. Press ENTER.  
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet  
Radio” screen appears.  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free  
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a  
computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt  
as your tastes change.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Artist Radio:  
Use q/wto select menu and then press ENTER.  
2
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music  
inspired by your choice.  
My Library:  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve  
heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
■ Using scrobbling control  
Search Station:  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.  
Top Artists Station:  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
terminated with or without notice.  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
• You can play tracks from personalized station  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and  
“Your Recommendations”).  
Start your free trial straight away when you create your  
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the  
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full  
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Using Slacker Personal Radio  
6
If you do not have an account, create one on the  
Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with your  
computer.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6  
Stores information to server, making it more likely  
that the song will be played again.  
Ban Song:  
1
■ Menu Items  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
If you already have a Slacker account, select “Sign  
in to your account” and then press ENTER.  
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter  
information from the remote control or the keys on the  
main unit.  
Stores information to server, making it less likely that  
the song will be played again.  
If there are no mistakes in the information you have  
entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK” then press  
ENTER.  
Ban Artist:  
2
3
Stores information to server, making it less likely that  
the songs from this artist will be played again.  
Mark Favorite:  
Adds the currently playing station to your favorites.  
Unmark Favorite:  
An account information confirmation screen appears.  
If you do not have an account, select “Access  
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a  
restricted version of the service.  
Deletes the currently playing station from your  
favorites.  
Note that use will be restricted.  
Add song to Library:  
Tip  
Adds the currently playing track to your library.  
Delete song from Library:  
Deletes the currently playing track from your library.  
Add to My Favorites:  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select a menu item and then press  
4
5
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.  
ENTER.  
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from this  
screen and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a station and then press ENTER  
or 1to start playback from the station.  
The playback screen appears.  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver  
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or 1  
to start playback.  
Using MP3tunes  
5
6
Tip  
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in  
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus  
safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:  
A playback screen appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes service as  
described in “Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu”  
(➔ page 1).  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6  
Creating an Account on your Computer  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and  
■ Menu Items  
1
then press ENTER.  
Go to Menu:  
From your computer, open a web browser and go  
to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup  
1
Displays additional menu options.  
Enter the e-mail address and password you used  
when creating your account, select “OK” and press  
ENTER.  
2
You can view or change your MP3tunes account  
settings by going to www.mp3tunes.com/account.  
Create an account.  
2
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter your user  
name and password from the remote controller or the  
buttons on the AV receiver.  
Click the Upload link (www.mp3tunes.com/upload)  
to add files to your Locker.  
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking on  
Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).  
4
If there are no mistakes in the information you have  
entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.  
3
An account information confirmation screen appears.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press ENTER.  
4
Music:  
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and Playlists.  
Shuffle:  
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your  
Locker.  
Search:  
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.  
Account Info:  
Your MP3tunes account information.  
Sign Out:  
Log out of your MP3tunes account.  
The track at the top of the music list is automatically  
played back.  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
®
Utilisation d’une  
webradio  
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes  
Pandora internet Radio –Pour commencer  
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2  
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement  
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir  
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis  
Procédures courantes dans le menu de  
webradio  
uniquement).............................................. 3  
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est  
affiché.  
1
Remarque  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4  
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :  
Add new user :  
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la région.  
Remove this user :  
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte  
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.  
Appuyez sur NET.  
1
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le témoin  
NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le câble  
Ethernet est fermement branché sur l’ampli-tuner AV.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6  
Conseil  
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
La page principale du service sélectionné s’affiche.  
2
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de  
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.  
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.  
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord vous  
déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez depuis  
l’écran « Users ».  
Fr-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Delete this station :  
Pandora® internet Radio  
–Pour commencer (États-Unis  
uniquement)  
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour sélectionner  
la station dans votre liste de stations, puis appuyez  
sur ENTER.  
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station de  
votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous décideriez de  
récréer la station avec les mêmes chansons ou les  
mêmes artistes, tous vos acceptations/rejets précédents  
seront perdus.  
Create station from this song :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cette  
chanson.  
Rename this station :  
Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle.  
Bookmark this artist :  
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour votre  
profil sur www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this song :  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Create a New Station :  
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et  
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que vous  
connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous aimez.  
Saisissez le nom d’une chanson, d’un artiste ou d’un  
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique pour  
vous en fonction des qualités musicales de la chanson,  
de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a Pandora  
1
Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora », puis appuyez  
sur ENTER.  
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez « I’m  
new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation apparaîtra  
sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez ce code. Utilisez  
un ordinateur branché sur Internet et connectez le  
navigateur à www.pandora.com/onkyo  
■ Eléments du menu  
I like this song :  
Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d’autres musiques  
similaires.  
I don’t like this song :  
Rejetez la chanson et Pandora éliminera cette chanson  
de la station courante.  
Why is this song playing? :  
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que  
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio  
personnelles.  
Don’t play the song for a month :  
Si vous en avez assez d’une chanson, vous pouvez  
mettre la chanson « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira  
plus pendant un mois.  
Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous  
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes  
en une étape !  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.  
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les  
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et vos  
stations webradio Pandora personnalisées. Lorsque  
vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer vos stations en  
saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes préférés. Après  
la création de votre compte et de vos stations, vous  
pouvez retourner à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez  
sur entrée pour écouter votre webradio Pandora  
personnalisée.  
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous pouvez  
ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre récepteur Onkyo  
en sélectionnant « I have a Pandora Account » et y  
accéder en entrant votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de  
passe.  
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage  
commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou  
des marques déposées de la société Pandora Media, Inc.  
Utilisées avec autorisation.  
Create station from this artist :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet artiste.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,  
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).  
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran  
« Users ».  
Fr-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la  
lecture.  
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis  
uniquement)  
2
3
Search :  
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste, par  
album ou par piste.  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur  
la télécommande.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your  
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser  
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un  
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Music Guide :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des genres,des  
meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs albums, des  
meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et des sélections du  
personnel.  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,  
RANDOM, REPEAT  
Remarque  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre  
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans  
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web.  
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne fonctionnent  
pas.  
Rhapsody Channels :  
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les  
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.  
Playlists :  
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles.  
My Library :  
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le  
catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My Library.  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
■ Eléments du menu  
Add track to My Library :  
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.  
Add album to My Library :  
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.  
Add playlist to My Library :  
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.  
Add channel to My Channels :  
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de  
lecture.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste de  
lecture à la liste My Favorites.  
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your  
entries » s’affiche.  
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,  
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).  
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran  
« Users ».  
Conseil  
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des canaux  
Rhapsody marqués de My Library.  
Fr-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)  
1
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous  
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe  
dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration  
Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom  
d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe, appelez Sirius XM  
au (888) 539-7474 pour obtenir une assistance.  
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus  
séparément et sont subordonnés par les conditions Sirius  
(voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous de lire cet accord  
avant d’acquérir votre abonnement. Sirius, XM et tous les  
logos et marques afférents sont des marques déposées de  
Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de ses filiales. Tous droits  
réservés.  
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de  
SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account Info » affiche  
le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai. Une fois la  
période d’essai expirée, si vous souhaitez continuer à  
écouter le service, vous devez vous abonner. Pour vous  
inscrire, accédez à l’adresse  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre  
ordinateur.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,  
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).  
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran  
« Users ».  
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un nom  
est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être saisis dans  
l’ampli-tuner AV.  
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV  
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous à  
l’aide de la télécommande :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your  
entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran « SiriusXM  
Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie que vous  
pouvez sélectionner.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
3
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie  
sélectionnée s’affiche.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de votre  
choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche et  
vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur  
la télécommande.  
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6  
■ Eléments du menu  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.  
Fr-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Profile :  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your  
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm  
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently Listened  
Tracks », « Library » et « Neighbours ».  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous  
aimez…  
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous pouvez  
vous y connecter pour sélectionner « Sign in to your  
account ». Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot  
de passe dans l’écran clavier suivant.  
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent. Si  
vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une trace de  
toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jouées. Quand vous  
vous rendez sur le site Web de Last.fm, vous pouvez voir  
les graphiques personnels de la musique que vous avez  
appréciée, les partagez avec vos amis et également voir ce  
qu’ils aiment.  
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.  
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour  
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de  
passe.  
3
appuyez sur ENTER ou  
1
pour démarrer la lecture.  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
■ Eléments du menu  
I Love this track :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your  
entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm  
Internet Radio » apparait.  
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un choix  
infini de stations de radio personnalisées et sans pub,  
Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir de la musique.  
Créez aujourd’hui votre compte Last.fm gratuit sur  
www.last.fm/join  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture augmente.  
Ban this track :  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture diminue.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Conseil  
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur de la  
radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo  
sans ordinateur !  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,  
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).  
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran  
« Users ».  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.  
Recommended Radio :  
■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling  
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées futées qui  
changent en même temps que vos goûts.  
Artist Radio :  
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous jouerons  
une station entière de musique inspirée par votre choix.  
My Library :  
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à partir  
de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que  
vous avez joint Last.fm.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis appuyez  
sur ENTER.  
Search Station :  
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être  
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste, par tag  
ou par nom d’utilisateur.  
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.  
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles dans  
certaines zones.  
Top Artists Station :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux évalués.  
Top Tags Station :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux évalués.  
Personal Station :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station  
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your  
Neighbourhood » et « Your Recommendations »).  
Tag Radio :  
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et nous  
vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.  
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la  
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même ce que  
cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts.  
Les derniers prix et les informations complètes sont  
disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe  
Fr-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur  
la télécommande.  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en un à  
partir du site Web de Slacker (www.slacker.com) à  
l’aide de votre ordinateur.  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
■ Eléments du menu  
Rate Song as Favorite :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et  
d’augmenter la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de  
nouveau.  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des  
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des  
touches sur l’appareil principal.  
Ban Song :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et  
de diminuer la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de  
nouveau.  
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne  
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/rpour  
sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran de confirmation des informations du compte  
s’affiche.  
2
3
Ban Artist :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et  
de diminuer la probabilité que les morceaux de cet  
artiste soient lus de nouveau.  
Mark Favorite :  
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à vos  
favoris.  
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, sélectionnez  
« Access without Sign In », puis appuyez sur  
ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du  
service.  
Unmark Favorite :  
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de  
vos favoris.  
Add song to Library :  
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à votre  
bibliothèque.  
Delete song from Library :  
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de  
votre bibliothèque.  
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,  
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).  
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran  
« Users ».  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du menu,  
4
5
puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la liste  
My Favorites.  
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour sélectionner  
« Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la  
lecture depuis cette station.  
L’écran de lecture apparaît.  
Fr-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
®
Uso de Internet Radio  
Uso de múltiples cuentas  
Pandora Internet Radio –Primeros pasos  
(solo EE.UU.) ............................................2  
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente  
entre varios usuarios. Después de registrar las cuentas de  
usuario, el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Procedimientos comunes en el menú  
Internet Radio  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3  
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de  
usuarios.  
Nota  
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a otra.  
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar  
una existente.  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo  
Norteamérica)........................................... 4  
Pulse NET.  
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se  
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea, verifique  
que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente conectado al  
receptor de AV.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6  
Consejo  
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio  
seleccionado.  
2
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples  
cuentas de usuario.  
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.  
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la  
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.  
Es-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® Internet Radio  
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la lista de  
emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.  
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una emisora de  
su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la información sobre sus  
aprobaciones / desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere  
volver a crear la emisora con la misma canción o  
artista.  
Create station from this song:  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canción.  
Rename this station:  
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil en  
www.pandora.com.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y  
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted conoce y  
le ayudará a descubrir música que le encantará.  
Create a New Station:  
Introduzca el nombre de una canción, artista o género;  
Pandora creará una emisora de radio exclusiva para  
usted basada en las cualidades musicales de esa  
canción, de ese artista o de ese género.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora  
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to  
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la pantalla  
del televisor. Tome nota de este código. Vaya a un  
ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a  
www.pandora.com/onkyo  
■ Elementos del menú  
I like this song:  
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) una canción, Pandora  
reproducirá más música parecida.  
I don’t like this song:  
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) la canción, Pandora  
eliminará dicha canción de la emisora actual.  
Why is this song playing?:  
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que  
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio  
personalizadas.  
Don’t play the song for a month:  
Si se cansa de una canción, puede “silenciarla” de  
modo que Pandora no la reproduzca durante un mes.  
Create station from this artist:  
Bookmark this song:  
Pandora marcará la canción actual y le permitirá  
comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo  
paso.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las  
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus  
emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de  
Pandora. Puede crear sus propias emisoras  
introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos  
cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente. Una vez  
creada su cuenta y sus emisoras, puede regresar al  
receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a  
escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de  
Pandora.  
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la imagen  
corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas  
comerciales registradas de Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con  
permiso.  
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede  
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have a  
Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su  
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso  
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar  
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Es-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego  
pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la reproducción.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)  
2
3
Search:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.  
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o canción.  
Music Guide:  
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si  
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a  
distancia.  
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas  
principales, álbumes principales o canciones  
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.  
Rhapsody Channels:  
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los  
principales redactores de Rhapsody.  
Playlists:  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione “Sign in  
to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el correo  
electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que  
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web.  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
Nota  
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no  
funcionan.  
■ Elementos del menú  
Add track to My Library:  
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add album to My Library:  
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Reproduzca sus listas personales.  
My Library:  
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en el  
catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.  
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione “OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm  
your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso  
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar  
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de reproducción a  
la lista Mis favoritos.  
Consejo  
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las emisoras de  
Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.  
Es-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo  
Norteamérica)  
1
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder  
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de  
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que  
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web. Si  
no sabe su nombre de usuario o la contraseña, llame a  
Sirius XM al número (888) 539-7474 para solicitar  
asistencia.  
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por  
separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius (consulte  
www.sirius.com). Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de  
comprar la suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y  
logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius  
XM Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos  
reservados.  
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de  
SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account Info”  
muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una vez que  
termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir escuchando  
este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para suscribirse vaya a  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su ordenador.  
Consejo  
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y una  
contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor de AV.  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso  
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar  
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el receptor de  
AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para usar el mando a  
distancia, siga este procedimiento:  
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione “OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm  
your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la categoría  
disponible para la selección.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
2
3
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la  
categoría seleccionada.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora deseada y  
luego pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la emisora  
seleccionada y ahora usted podrá escuchar SiriusXM  
Internet Radio.  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a  
distancia.  
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6  
■ Elementos del menú  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Es-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le gusta...  
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente. Si  
tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un seguimiento  
de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar. Cuando  
visite el sitio web de Last.fm, podrá ver listas personales de  
la música que ha disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y  
también ver lo que les gusta a ellos.  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede acceder a ella  
para seleccionar “Sign in to your account”.  
Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contraseña en la  
siguiente pantalla de teclado.  
Se desconecta de su cuenta.  
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego  
pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione “OK”.  
3
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita variedad  
de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin publicidad,  
Last.fm es una forma excelente de descubrir música. Cree  
hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm en  
www.last.fm/join  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm  
your entries”.  
■ Elementos del menú  
I Love this track:  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
“Last.fm Internet Radio”.  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que  
se reproduce.  
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm Radio  
sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de  
un ordenador.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso  
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar  
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Ban this track:  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la  
que se reproduce.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Recommended Radio:  
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones  
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada  
momento.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
2
Search Station:  
Artist Radio:  
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o nombre  
de usuario.  
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una emisora de  
radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elección.  
My Library:  
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música que ha  
escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
■ Uso del control de scrobbling  
Top Artists Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor  
clasificados.  
Top Tags Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor  
clasificadas.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros  
pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.  
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén  
disponibles en algunas zonas.  
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y podrá  
escucharlo durante horas.  
Personal Station:  
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” y “Your  
Recommendations”).  
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá por sí  
mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del mundo al  
alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los precios  
actualizados y toda la información que desee en  
www.last.fm/subscribe  
Es-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web de  
Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su ordenador.  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
■ Elementos del menú  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea  
más probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.  
Ban Song:  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione “Sign  
in to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede introducir  
información desde el mando a distancia o desde el  
teclado de la unidad principal.  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea  
menos probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.  
Ban Artist:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea  
menos probable que las canciones de este artista se  
vuelvan a reproducir.  
Mark Favorite:  
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a los favoritos.  
Si no hay errores en la información que ha  
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar  
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.  
2
3
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la  
información de la cuenta.  
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access without  
Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar una versión  
restringida del servicio.  
Unmark Favorite:  
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.  
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de los favoritos.  
Add song to Library:  
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a su biblioteca.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso  
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar  
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego pulse  
Delete song from Library:  
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de la biblioteca.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis favoritos.  
4
5
ENTER.  
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out” en  
esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y luego  
pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la reproducción de  
la emisora.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.  
Es-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Y1203-2  
SN 29401189B  
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 1 8 9 B *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which  
means you can freely switch between several logins.  
After registering user accounts, login is performed from  
the “Users” screen.  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Note  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
Remove this user:  
You can either store a new user account, or delete  
an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
A list of the network services appears, and the NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet  
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.  
Tip  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”, and  
then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a  
free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs  
you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,  
you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,  
share them with friends and see what they like, too.  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign  
in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in the  
next keyboard screen.  
It signs out from your account.  
■ Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER or 1  
to start playback.  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your user  
3
name and password.  
2. Select “OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless  
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a  
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm  
account today at www.last.fm/join  
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6  
■ Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
4. Press ENTER.  
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet  
Radio” screen appears.  
UK and Germany only:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free  
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a  
computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt  
as your tastes change.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from  
the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select menu and then press ENTER.  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
2
Artist Radio:  
Search Station:  
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music  
inspired by your choice.  
My Library:  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve  
heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
■ Using scrobbling control  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.  
Top Artists Station:  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
You can play tracks from personalized station (“Your  
Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and “Your  
Recommendations”).  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
terminated with or without notice.  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
Start your free trial straight away when you create your  
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the  
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full  
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
Internetradio verwenden  
Verwendung mehrerer Konten  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2  
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten, was  
bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren Logins  
umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der  
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm  
aus vorgenommen.  
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den  
Internetradio-Menüs  
Anmerkung  
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm des  
Nutzers angezeigt wird.  
1
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.  
Das folgende Menü erscheint:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto  
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.  
Drücken Sie NET.  
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die  
NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt, überprüfen  
Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-Receiver  
eingesteckt ist.  
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und  
drücken Sie ENTER.  
2
Tipp  
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen  
Nutzerkonten zu.  
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services erscheint.  
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.  
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich  
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann  
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.  
De-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
Profile:  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your account“  
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto  
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign in to  
your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre  
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden  
Tastaturanzeige ein.  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,  
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.  
Account Info:  
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre  
Lieblingsmusik merkt...  
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie ein  
kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden darin alle  
kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie die Last.fm-  
Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre persönlichen Charts der von  
Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden  
und sehen Sie auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.  
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.  
■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender auszuwählen  
und dann drücken Sie ENTER oder 1 , um die  
Wiedergabe zu starten.  
3
1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/rund den ENTER, um  
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.  
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.  
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer schier  
endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten, werbefreien  
Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige Gelegenheit, um  
Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-  
Konto noch heute unter www.last.fm/join  
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die  
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.  
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm  
your entries“ erscheint.  
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6  
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.  
„Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach erscheint  
die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.  
■ Menüsymbole  
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:  
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch ohne  
Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-Radiosender auf  
Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!  
I Love this track:  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server  
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird  
erhöht.  
Tipp  
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,  
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer Konten“  
nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom „Users“-  
Bildschirm aus erfolgen.  
Recommended Radio:  
Ban this track:  
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste Empfehlungen,  
die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack verändern.  
Artist Radio:  
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen  
für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl  
inspirierter Musik.  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server  
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird  
verringert.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste  
hinzu.  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü auszuwählen  
und dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
Search Station:  
2
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten, Tags  
oder Benutzernamen suchen.  
My Library:  
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an einer  
Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei  
Last.fm gehört haben.  
Top Artists Station:  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten  
wiedergeben.  
Top Tags Station:  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags  
wiedergeben.  
■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und dann  
Tag Radio:  
drücken Sie ENTER.  
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen Musikstil  
und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.  
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-Dienste  
können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung eingestellt  
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr  
Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist,  
jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu können.  
Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind  
unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich  
werden.  
Personal Station:  
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste eventuell  
nicht verfügbar.  
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich angepassten  
Sender wiedergeben („Your Library“, „Your  
Neighbourhood“ und „Your Recommendations“).  
Y1112-1  
SN 29401229  
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 2 2 9 *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Control Codes  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a  
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.  
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”  
button and “Display” button.  
Remote Control Codes  
/
1
2
Notes:  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].  
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any  
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work  
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input  
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD  
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.  
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control  
code.  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE  
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.  
Notes:  
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.  
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.  
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for  
that component.  
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until  
it matches your component.  
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.  
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited  
to part of the component’s functionality.  
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to  
change by the manufacturer.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codes de télécommande  
Códigos de control remoto  
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez  
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant  
environ 3 secondes).  
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un  
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3  
segundos).  
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.  
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le  
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».  
Remarques :  
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.  
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por  
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.  
Notas:  
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi  
zone.  
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.  
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].  
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de  
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos  
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione  
un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el  
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione  
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.  
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].  
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes  
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,  
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez  
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre  
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]  
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.  
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para  
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.  
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.  
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE  
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.  
Notas:  
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.  
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos  
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede  
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.  
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno  
hasta que coincida con su componente.  
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.  
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad  
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.  
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres  
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.  
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.  
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE  
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.  
Remarques :  
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.  
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents  
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le  
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.  
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce  
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.  
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.  
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être  
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.  
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del  
mando a distancia.  
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,  
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.  
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande  
existants.  
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la  
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codici del telecomando  
Fernbedienungscodes  
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il  
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben  
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.  
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum  
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.  
Hinweise:  
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).  
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.  
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,  
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.  
Note:  
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi  
zona.  
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet  
werden.  
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.  
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die  
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.  
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit  
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle  
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten  
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.  
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.  
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di  
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da  
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda  
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD  
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.  
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5  
cifre.  
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen  
Herstellercode ein.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.  
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die  
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.  
Hinweise:  
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.  
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen  
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes  
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.  
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln  
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.  
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.  
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE  
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.  
Note:  
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.  
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice  
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale  
apparecchio.  
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché  
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.  
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.  
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata  
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.  
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist  
nicht garantiert.  
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre  
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.  
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung  
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.  
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.  
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma  
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.  
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind  
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Afstandsbedieningscodes  
Fjärrstyrningskoder  
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code  
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt  
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.  
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,  
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.  
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening gaat branden.  
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,  
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.  
Anmärkningar:  
Opmerkingen:  
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.  
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].  
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi  
zone-toets.  
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst  
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som  
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som  
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska  
du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.  
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].  
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes  
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen  
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die  
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld  
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de  
afstandsbedieningscode.  
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.  
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-  
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.  
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige  
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.  
2
Anmärkningar:  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.  
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets  
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.  
Opmerkingen:  
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van  
uw AV-receiver.  
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende  
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de  
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.  
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.  
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika  
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta  
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.  
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de  
stämmer överens med din utrustning.  
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.  
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet  
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.  
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.  
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.  
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een  
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.  
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet  
gegarandeerd.  
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan  
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.  
•
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de  
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.  
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen  
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
遙控代碼  
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住  
遥控代码  
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住[DISPLAY  
（显示）]（大约 3 秒钟）。  
1
1
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。  
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。  
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）  
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。  
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯亮起。  
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode（遥控模  
式）”按钮和“Display（显示）”按钮。  
注意：  
注意：  
• [RECEIVER（接收机）]和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。  
• 只能为[TV（电视）]输入电视遥控编码。  
• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。  
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。  
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE  
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按  
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如，如果  
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。  
•
除[RECEIVER（接收机）]、[TV（电视）]和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE（遥  
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因  
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮。例如，如果  
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择[TV/CD（电视/CD）]。  
在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。  
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。  
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈  
會慢慢地閃爍一次。  
在 30 秒内，使用数字按钮输入 5 位数的遥控编码。  
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯闪烁两次。  
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯会  
缓慢闪烁一次。  
2
2
注意：  
注意：  
• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。  
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您  
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。  
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。  
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便  
可激活相应设备的相关预设。  
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應  
為止。  
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。  
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。  
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。  
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。  
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。  
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。  
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。  
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。  
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Cable/PVR Combination  
Dedicated Onkyo Receiver  
Cable Set Top Box  
mio TV  
Cable Set Top Box  
Toshiba  
Default  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
62503  
62506  
62507  
02802  
01509  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
Shaw  
01877  
Motorola  
01376, 00858, 01562,  
01982, 01998, 02378  
UPC  
01582  
01877, 01982  
01376  
Verizon  
02378  
Moxi  
02187  
Videotron  
Virgin Media  
Visiopass  
VTR  
01877  
Suddenlink  
Thomson  
Time Warner  
UPC  
01376, 01877  
01582  
NEC  
01496  
Cable Set Top Box  
ADB  
01068, 01060  
00817  
Neuf TV  
Noos  
03107  
02254, 02769  
02769  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01582  
00817  
Aon  
01376  
NTL  
01068, 01060  
02767  
Arris  
02187  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
01877  
Videotron  
VTR  
01877  
Numericable  
Ono  
AT&T  
00858  
00660, 01666, 02015,  
02142, 02447, 02774  
01376  
01068, 01562  
01060  
Bright House  
BT Vision  
Cable & Wireless  
Cable One  
Cablecom  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
02294  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
01877  
Optus  
Orange  
Pace  
02142  
Cable/PVR Combination  
00817  
01068  
Arris  
02187  
01376, 01877, 01068,  
01060, 01982  
IPTV  
01376, 01877  
01582  
Bright House  
Cable One  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01877, 01982  
ADB  
02254, 02769  
02769  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01488, 01982  
Aon  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
00817, 01582, 02294,  
02767  
AT&T  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
Cisco  
00858  
02294  
Cisco  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345, 02378  
Pioneer  
RCN  
01877, 01500  
01376  
Cisco  
02657  
Com Hem  
Comcast  
00817, 00660, 01666,  
02015, 02447  
Comcast  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Rogers  
Sagem  
Samsung  
01877  
Kreatel  
mio TV  
Motorola  
00817  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
02187  
02802  
01877, 01060, 01666,  
02015, 02774  
Digeo  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
01877  
Freebox  
Humax  
Insight  
01482  
Scientific Atlanta  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345  
Daeryung  
Digeo  
02142, 03051, 03053  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
02187  
02657  
SFR  
03107  
DX Antenna  
France Telecom  
Freebox  
Fujitsu  
01500  
J:COM  
Knology  
Mediacom  
Motorola  
Moxi  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
Shaw  
01376  
00817  
SingTel  
Sony  
01998, 02802  
01460  
01482  
01376, 01877  
01376  
SingTel  
01998, 02802  
01385  
01497  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
Stofa  
02015  
Humax  
00660, 02142, 02447,  
03051, 03053  
02187  
02345  
Suddenlink  
Sumitomo  
Telewest  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01376, 01877  
01500  
Numericable  
Pace  
02767  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
Insight  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
01877  
02378  
01068  
J:COM  
Knology  
Kreatel  
Macab  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01982  
01385  
01582, 02767  
01877  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
02345  
01385  
Pioneer  
Rogers  
ADB  
Aon  
02769  
02769  
Thomson  
Time Warner  
01582, 01982, 02769  
01376, 01877, 02187  
00817  
01877  
Mediacom  
01376, 01877  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
CD  
CD  
MD  
AT&T  
00858  
Goldmund  
Grundig  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Integra  
JVC  
70157  
Restek  
70157  
Yamaha  
70490  
BT Vision  
Cisco  
02294  
70157  
Revox  
70157  
Cassette Deck  
Aiwa  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
70157  
Rotel  
70157  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40070  
40244  
40070  
40029  
40029  
40029  
42157  
40027  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40243  
40029  
40244  
40027, 40029  
40097  
Kreatel  
70032  
SAE  
70157  
Arcam  
Motorola  
Neuf TV  
Philips  
00858, 02378  
03107  
71817, 70101  
70072  
Sansui  
70157  
Audiolab  
Carver  
SAST  
70157  
02294  
Kenwood  
Krell  
70626, 70157, 70036  
70157  
Siemens  
Silsonic  
Simaudio  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
70157  
Denon  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858  
70036  
Grundig  
Harman/Kardon  
Inkel  
03107  
Linn  
70157  
70157  
Verizon  
02378  
Loewe  
70157  
70157  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Matsui  
MCS  
70157  
70490, 70000  
70157  
CD  
JVC  
70626, 70029, 70157  
70157  
Sylvania  
TAG McLaren  
Tandy  
Advantage  
AH!  
70032  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Myryad  
Onkyo  
70157  
70029  
70032  
Aiwa  
Memorex  
Meridian  
Micromega  
Miro  
70032  
Technics  
Thorens  
Thule Audio  
Traxdata  
Universum  
Victor  
70029, 70303  
70157  
Arcam  
70157  
Atoll Electronique  
Audio Research  
Audiolab  
Audiomeca  
Audioton  
AVI  
70157  
70157  
Optimus  
Philips  
70000  
70626  
Mission  
Myryad  
NAD  
70157  
70157  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Radiola  
RCA  
70157  
70072  
70000, 70721  
70157  
Wards  
70000, 70032, 70157  
70490, 70032, 70036  
70157  
Naim  
Yamaha  
Zonda  
Balanced Audio  
Technology  
NSM  
70157  
Revox  
Onkyo  
71817  
Cairn  
70157  
CD-R  
Denon  
JVC  
Sansui  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Primare  
Proton  
70000, 70032  
70029, 70303  
70626, 70157  
70032, 70101  
70157  
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303  
70626, 70766  
70072  
Sony  
Cambridge  
Cambridge Audio  
Carver  
70157  
Thorens  
Victor  
70157  
Kenwood  
Marantz  
Onkyo  
Philips  
Sony  
70626  
70157  
70626  
Wards  
CCE  
70157  
71323  
Yamaha  
70157  
Cyrus  
70157  
70626  
70157  
Denon  
70626, 70766  
70000  
Accessory  
Apple  
70000  
QED  
70157  
DKK  
81115  
Quad  
70157  
DMX Electronics  
Dynaco  
70157  
MD  
Jamo  
82228  
Quasar  
Radiola  
RCA  
70029  
70157  
Onkyo  
Sony  
70868  
Logitech  
Onkyo  
82182  
70157  
Genexxa  
70000, 70032  
70490, 70000  
82990, 81993, 82351  
70032  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Accessory  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
CGV  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Polk Audio  
82228  
Amstrad  
00847, 01175, 01662,  
01693  
01413, 01567  
01334, 01626  
01176  
Durabrand  
Echostar  
01284  
Chess  
00775, 00853, 01323,  
01409, 02527  
Ansonic  
Arnion  
02418  
Video - Accessory  
ADB  
CityCom  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Com Hem  
Comag  
01300  
Eco-Star  
Edision  
01413  
02254, 02769  
02769  
01413  
ASCI  
01334  
01631  
Aon  
01626  
AssCom  
Astro  
00853  
Elap  
01413, 01567  
02418  
Apple  
02615  
01176, 01915  
01413  
00173, 01100  
02418  
Elbe  
AT&T  
00858  
Atlanta  
Atsat  
Energy Sistem  
Engel  
01631, 02418  
01251  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
02294  
Comsat  
01413  
01300  
02657  
Coship  
01457  
AtSky  
01334  
EuroLine  
Europhon  
Europsat  
Expressvu  
Fagor  
01251  
Cisco  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Crown  
01284  
Audiola  
Aurora  
02418  
01334  
Kreatel  
CS  
01631  
00879, 00642, 01433  
00879, 00642, 01259  
01631  
01413, 01611  
00775  
mio TV  
Motorola  
02802  
Cyfra+  
01409  
Austar  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
D-box  
00853, 02527  
00723, 01114  
01626  
Avanit  
01611  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
Awa  
02418  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
01291  
Dantax  
02657  
Axil  
01413, 01457, 02418  
01626  
01626  
Denver  
02418  
Philips  
02294  
Axitronic  
Balmet  
Bell ExpressVu  
Belson  
Fly Com  
FMD  
01457  
Dgtec  
01242, 01631, 02418  
02418  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
01457  
01413, 01457  
00879, 01176, 01356  
02408  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
00775  
Foxtel  
SingTel  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01998, 02802  
01385  
02418  
Digi Raum Electronics 01176  
Freesat  
Big Sat  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Boshmann  
Boston  
01457  
Digiality  
Digifusion  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
DigiQuest  
Digisky  
01334  
Fuba  
00173, 01251  
00853, 00879  
01176  
02345  
01284  
01645  
Galaxis  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
00173  
01284  
General Satellite  
Globo  
02378  
01413, 01631  
01251  
01284  
01251, 01334, 01626  
00775  
01300, 01457, 01631  
01457  
GOI  
Receiver  
Boxer  
01458  
Gold Box  
Gold Vision  
GoldMaster  
Goodmans  
Gradiente  
Grandin  
Grocos  
00853  
Onkyo  
52503  
British Sky  
Broadcasting  
00847, 01175, 01662  
DigitalBox  
Digiwave  
DirecTV  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
01100, 01631  
01631  
01631  
01334  
Satellite Set Top Box  
BskyB  
Bush  
00847, 01175, 01662  
01377, 00099  
00775  
01284, 01291  
00099, 00887  
01626  
@sat  
01300  
01284, 01291, 01626,  
01645  
@Sky  
01334  
00775  
Acoustic Solutions  
ADB  
01284  
Canal Digital  
Canal Satellite  
Canal+  
00853, 01334  
00853, 02657  
00853, 02657  
00853, 02657  
01457  
DishTV  
01300  
01409, 01457  
00642, 00887, 01259  
01626  
DRE  
01176  
Grundig  
00847, 00853, 00173,  
00879, 01284, 01291  
Akura  
Dream Multimedia  
DSE  
01237  
Alba  
01284  
CanalSat  
Haier  
Hallo  
02418  
01626  
02280, 02418  
00879, 00642, 01433  
Allvision  
01334  
Centrex  
DSTV  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Hama  
01567  
Leiko  
01626  
Pace  
00847, 00853, 00887,  
01175, 01323, 01356,  
01423, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02059, 02060,  
02211, 02657  
Sat Industrie  
SAT+  
01611  
Hanseatic  
Hirschmann  
Hitachi  
Hornet  
01100  
00173  
01284  
01300  
00775  
Lemon  
01334  
01409  
Lenoxx  
Linsar  
01611  
Satplus  
01100  
01284  
SatyCon  
01631  
Listo  
01626  
Schaub Lorenz  
Schneider  
Schwaiger  
Sedea Electronique  
SEG  
02418  
Pacific  
01284  
HTS  
Lodos  
01284  
01206, 01251  
01334, 01457, 01631  
01206, 01626  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01611  
Palcom  
Panasat  
Panasonic  
01409, 01611  
00879, 01433  
Humax  
01377, 01176, 01427,  
01675, 01808, 01882,  
01915, 02144, 02408,  
02616  
Logik  
01284  
Macab  
00853  
00847, 01304, 01404,  
03099  
Manhattan  
Maspro  
Matsui  
01300  
Panda  
Pass  
00173  
00173  
Servimat  
ServiSat  
ID Digital  
ID Sat  
01176  
01567  
00173, 01284, 01626  
01334  
01251  
01334  
peeKTon  
Philips  
01457, 02418  
Maximum  
Mediabox  
Mediacom  
MediaSat  
Medion  
MegaSat  
Metronic  
Shark  
01631  
ILLUSION sat  
Imperial  
Indovision  
iNETBOX  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
01631  
00099, 00853, 00173,  
01114, 00887, 00133,  
02211  
00853  
Sherwood  
Siemens  
01409  
01195, 01334  
00887  
01206  
00173, 01334, 01626,  
02418  
00853  
01237  
Phoenix  
Pino  
02418  
Sigmatek  
SKY  
02418  
01334, 01626  
01631  
01626  
01334  
00099, 00847, 00887,  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
00099  
Pioneer  
PMB  
00853, 01308  
01611  
01334, 01413, 01631,  
02418  
inVion  
02418  
iotronic  
01413  
SKY Brazil  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
00887  
Premiere  
Pro Basic  
Proline  
QNS  
00723  
Metz  
00173  
ISkyB  
00887  
02754  
00853  
Moserbaer  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
01251  
ITT  
02418  
00853, 01693, 01850  
02211  
01284  
02527, 02761  
ITT Nokia  
Jadeworld  
Jaeger  
00723  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky XL  
01404  
00879, 00642, 01433,  
02059, 02060  
00642  
02299, 02616, 03099  
01251  
RCA  
01291  
01334  
Regal  
01251  
MySky  
NEOTION  
Netsat  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
JVC  
00775  
Sky+  
01175, 01662  
Roadstar  
Rollmaster  
Rownsonic  
SAB  
00853  
KabelBW  
Kaon  
01195, 01882, 01915  
01300  
Skymaster  
01334, 01409, 01567,  
01611  
01413  
00099, 00887  
00723  
01567  
Nikko  
Skymax  
Skyplus  
01413  
Kathrein  
Kenwood  
Koenig  
00173, 01561, 01567  
00853  
01251, 01300, 01631  
01114  
Nokia  
00853, 00723, 01223  
01611  
01175, 01334  
01100  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Samsung  
Nordmende  
NPG  
SkySat  
01631  
02418  
01631  
Skyvision  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
01334  
Kreiling  
Kreiselmeyer  
L&S Electronic  
LaSAT  
01626  
01377, 00853, 01175,  
01206, 01458, 01662,  
02986  
Onn  
01284  
01409  
00173  
Optex  
01413, 01611, 01626  
00879, 01356  
01334  
01404, 01413, 01631  
01457  
01334  
Optus  
Sansui  
01251  
01626  
01300  
SmartVision  
Sony  
00173  
Orbis  
Sanyo  
00847, 00853, 01558,  
02299  
Lava  
01631  
Orbitech  
01100, 01195  
Sat Control  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
SAT/PVR Combination  
SAT/PVR Combination  
Star  
00887  
UBC  
00642  
BskyB  
01175, 01662  
Schneider  
01206  
01206  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
UEC  
00879, 01356  
01251, 01626, 02418  
01882  
Bush  
01645  
Sedea Electronique  
SKY  
00853, 00879, 01284,  
01300, 01409, 01626,  
02418  
United  
Canal Satellite  
Canal+  
02657  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
Unitymedia  
Universum  
Variosat  
VEA  
02657  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky+  
02754  
00173, 01251  
00173  
CanalSat  
02657  
Sunny  
01300  
01693, 01850  
02211  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
Digifusion  
DigiQuest  
DirecTV  
02527  
Sunstar  
00642  
02418  
01645  
Supernova  
Supratech  
Systec  
00887  
02299, 03099  
01662  
Vestel  
01251, 01284  
01195  
01300  
01413  
Viasat  
01377, 00099, 20739  
00775  
01334  
Skyplus  
01175, 01334  
01631  
Vision  
01626  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
Sytech  
02418  
Smart  
Visiosat  
Vitecom  
Vivax  
01413, 01457  
01413  
00775  
TBoston  
Teac  
01251, 02418  
01251  
Sony  
02299  
Dream Multimedia  
Echostar  
01237  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
02418  
00775, 02527  
01631  
Technical  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Techwood  
TELE System  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01626  
01300  
Volcasat  
Wavelength  
Wharfedale  
Wisi  
02418  
Edision  
01284  
Sunny  
01300  
01413  
Expressvu  
Foxtel  
00775  
01100, 01195  
01206  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01195  
01284  
01356  
01206  
00173  
Humax  
01176, 01427, 01675,  
01808  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01251, 01409, 01611  
02527, 02761  
02527  
Worldsat  
Woxter  
Xsat  
01251  
ID Sat  
01334  
01195  
02418  
iNETBOX  
Kaon  
01237  
Thomson  
Topfield  
01175, 01662  
01206  
00847, 01323  
01300  
01100, 01195, 01251,  
01334, 01626  
01300  
Xtreme  
Yakumo  
Yes  
Kathrein  
Maximum  
Mediacom  
MegaSat  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
MySky  
01561  
Viasat  
01195  
01413  
Televes  
Televisa  
Tevion  
01300, 01334  
00887  
01334  
Xtreme  
01300  
00887  
01206  
Zehnder  
01251, 01334, 01413,  
01631  
01409  
Television  
A.R. Systems  
Accent  
01631  
Thomson  
00847, 00853, 01175,  
01046, 01291, 01662  
10556, 10037  
10037  
Zinwell  
02280, 02761  
01300  
02527  
02059, 02060  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
Tonna  
Topfield  
Toshiba  
Trevi  
01611  
01206  
01284  
01251  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Acer  
11339  
@sat  
Acoustic Solutions  
Action  
11037, 11667  
10650  
NEOTION  
Pace  
01175, 01356, 01423,  
01662, 01693, 01850,  
02059, 02060, 02211,  
02657  
SAT/PVR Combination  
Addison  
AEG  
10653  
Triax  
00853, 01251, 01291,  
01413, 01611, 01626,  
01631  
@sat  
01300  
11037, 11324  
12719  
Amstrad  
Atsat  
01175, 01662, 01693  
01300  
Agfaphoto  
Aiko  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01304, 03099  
00099  
10037  
Tricolor TV  
True Visions  
Twinner  
01176  
02408  
01611  
Bell ExpressVu  
00775  
Aim  
10037, 10499  
Samsung  
Sat Control  
01175, 01206, 01662  
01300  
British Sky  
Broadcasting  
01175, 01662  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Television  
Casio  
Television  
Akai  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10208,  
11675  
Basic Line  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
10037  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
10698  
Cathay  
10037  
Baur  
10037, 10195, 10512  
10178  
Digatron  
Digihome  
Digiline  
Digitek  
Digitor  
Dixi  
10037  
CCE  
10037  
Akiba  
Akito  
Akura  
10037  
10037  
Beaumark  
Beijing  
Beko  
11667  
Centrum  
Centurion  
Changhong  
Chimei  
11037  
10208  
10037, 10668  
11709  
10037  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11363,  
11585, 11667, 11709  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
10508  
10037, 10698  
10037  
11666  
Belson  
10698  
Clarivox  
Classic  
10037  
Alba  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11585  
Belstar  
11037  
DL  
11363  
10499  
Beon  
10037  
DMTech  
Domeos  
Drean  
12001  
Alien  
11037  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Condor  
Conrowa  
Contec  
10037, 10714, 11324  
11037  
Berthen  
Bestar  
10556, 10668  
10037  
10668  
Allstar  
10037  
10037  
Amstrad  
Anam  
10171, 10037, 11037  
10037  
10037  
Bexa  
12493  
DSE  
10698  
10698  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Blue Sky  
11037  
Dual  
10037, 11037, 11585,  
11667  
Anam National  
Andersson  
Anitech  
Ansonic  
AOC  
10037, 10650  
11585  
10037  
10195  
Cosmel  
CPTEC  
Crown  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10715, 10499, 11324,  
11363, 11652, 11709  
Durabrand  
10178, 10171, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
10037  
10625, 11363  
10037, 10668  
10178, 10625, 11365  
10037, 10714  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715, 10208,  
11652  
Dux  
10037  
DX Antenna  
Dynatron  
Dynex  
11817, 13817  
10037  
Ardem  
Boca  
11652  
Cyberpix  
D-Vision  
Daewoo  
11667  
Arena  
Boman  
Bork  
11324  
12049  
10556, 10037  
Aristona  
ART  
10556, 10037  
11037  
11363  
e-motion  
E:max  
11709  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10634, 10499, 12098  
BPL  
10037, 10208  
10625, 10714, 10560  
11709  
11324  
Art Mito  
Asberg  
11585  
Brandt  
Brimax  
Brinkmann  
Brionvega  
Bush  
Dansai  
Dantax  
10037, 10208  
Easy Living  
ECE  
11666, 11709  
10037  
10037  
10714, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
Astra  
10037  
10037, 10668  
10037  
Elbe  
10556, 10037  
11755  
ATD  
10698  
Datsura  
Dawa  
10208  
Electrograph  
Element  
Elfunk  
Atlantic  
Audiosonic  
Audiovox  
Audioworld  
Aventura  
Axxon  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10208, 11585, 11652,  
11667, 12719  
10037  
11886  
10037, 10714, 10715  
11564  
Daytron  
De Graaf  
DEC  
10037  
11037  
10208  
ELG  
10037  
10698  
11709  
Byd:sign  
Camper  
Carad  
12140, 12209  
10037  
Elin  
10037  
10171  
Decca  
10037  
Elite  
10037  
10714  
Denver  
Desmet  
Diamant  
Diamond  
10037, 11709  
10037  
10668, 11037  
10037  
Emerson  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11394,  
11864, 11886  
Baird  
10208  
Carena  
Bang & Olufsen  
Barco  
10565  
10037  
Carrefour  
Cascade  
10037  
10556  
Envision  
Epson  
11365, 11506  
11379  
10698  
10037  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Erres  
Television  
Genesis  
Genexxa  
GFM  
Television  
Television  
ITV  
10037  
10037  
Hisense  
10556, 10508, 10208,  
11363, 12098  
10037  
ESA  
10171  
10037  
JGC  
11709  
Hitachi  
10150, 10178, 10037,  
10634, 11037, 10508,  
10499, 10578, 11576,  
11585, 11643, 11667,  
11691, 12433  
ESC  
10037  
10171, 11864, 11886  
11585  
Jinfeng  
Jinxing  
JMB  
10208  
Euroman  
Europa  
10037  
Godrej  
10556, 10037, 10698  
10556, 10634, 10499  
10556  
10037  
Goldfunk  
GoldStar  
10668  
Europhon  
Evesham  
Excello  
Exquisit  
Ferguson  
10037  
10178, 10037, 10714,  
10715  
Jubilee  
JVC  
Hitachi Fujian  
Hitec  
10150  
10698  
10714  
10037  
11666  
11295  
11248, 11667  
11037  
10650, 10653, 10508,  
11428, 11601, 12271  
Goodmans  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10560, 10668,  
10634, 11037, 10499,  
11585, 11667  
Kaisui  
Karcher  
Kathrein  
Kendo  
Kennex  
Kioto  
10037  
Hoeher  
10037  
10714, 11324  
10556  
Hornyphon  
Hugoson  
Humax  
10037, 10625, 10560,  
10195, 11037, 11585  
Gorenje  
Gradiente  
Graetz  
11585  
Fidelity  
Finlandia  
Finlux  
10171, 10037, 10512  
10208  
10037, 11037, 11585  
11037  
10037  
Hypson  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715  
10714  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10715, 11248, 11667  
10556  
Granada  
Grandin  
10037, 10560, 10208  
Hyundai  
Iberia  
11037, 10698  
10037  
Kiton  
10037, 10668  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
Firstline  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10208,  
11363  
KLL  
ICE  
10037  
Kneissel  
Koenig  
Kolin  
10556, 10037, 10499  
10037  
Grundig  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
11223, 11667, 12625  
iLo  
11394  
Fisher  
10208  
Imperial  
Indiana  
Ingelen  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
Insignia  
10037  
10150, 10037, 11610,  
11755  
Flint  
10037  
GVA  
11363, 12098  
12001  
10037  
Formenti  
Fraba  
10037  
H & B  
Kolster  
Konka  
Korpel  
Kosmos  
Kunlun  
L&S Electronic  
Lavic  
10037  
10714  
10037  
Haier  
10037, 10698, 10508  
10178  
10037, 10714  
10037  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Friac  
10037, 10499  
11709  
Hallmark  
Hankook  
Hanseatic  
Fujicom  
Fujitsu  
Fujitsu Siemens  
Funai  
10178  
10037  
10171, 11423, 11564,  
12049  
10809  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10634, 10499,  
12001  
10208  
10809, 11248, 11666  
Integra  
Interbuy  
Interfunk  
Internal  
Intervision  
Irradio  
IRT  
11807, 13100, 13500  
10037  
10714  
10171, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11394, 11666,  
11817, 13817  
11363  
Hantarex  
Hantor  
Harwood  
Hauppauge  
HB  
10037  
10037, 10512  
10556  
Lavis  
11037  
10037  
Lecson  
Lenco  
10037  
G-Hanz  
Gaba  
11363  
11037  
10037  
10037  
11755  
10037  
10037  
10037, 11037  
10037  
10037  
10037  
Leyco  
Galaxi  
Galaxis  
Gateway  
GE  
11324  
10698  
LG  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10698,  
11423, 11768, 11840,  
12182, 12358, 12424,  
12834  
HCM  
10037  
Isukai  
10037  
Highline  
Hinari  
10037  
ITS  
10037  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560  
10037, 10208  
10714  
ITT  
10208  
Hisawa  
GEC  
10037  
ITT Nokia  
10208  
Liesenkoetter  
10037  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Television  
Naiko  
Television  
Onix  
Lifetec  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 12001  
Medion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10512, 11248, 11585,  
11667, 12001, 12719  
10037  
10698  
Nakimura  
National  
NEC  
10037  
Onkyo  
Onn  
11807, 13100, 13500  
11667, 11709  
11709  
Linsar  
11585  
10508, 10208  
Local India TV  
Local Malaysia TV  
Lodos  
10208  
10178, 10653, 10508,  
10499  
Onyx  
Megatron  
MEI  
10178  
10698  
Opera  
Optimus  
Orbit  
10037, 10714  
10650  
11037  
11037  
Neckermann  
NEI  
10556, 10037  
10037, 11037  
11324  
Memorex  
Mercury  
Mermaid  
Metronic  
Metz  
10150, 10178, 11037  
10037  
Loewe  
10037, 10512, 11884  
11037, 10698  
10668  
10037  
Logik  
NEO  
Orion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 12001  
10037  
Logix  
Netsat  
10037  
10625  
Luma  
11037  
NetTV  
11755  
Orline  
10037  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 11533  
Lumatron  
Lumenio  
Lux May  
Luxor  
10037, 10668  
10037  
Neufunk  
New Tech  
Newave  
Nikkai  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10556, 10037  
10178  
Ormond  
Osaki  
10668, 11037  
10556, 10037  
10037  
MGA  
10150, 10178  
10037  
Osio  
Micromaxx  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11324, 12001  
11037, 10208  
10178  
10037  
Osume  
Otto Versand  
10037  
LXI  
Nikkei  
10714  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
10512  
Microspot  
Mikomi  
11614  
M Electronic  
10037, 10714, 10634,  
10195, 10512, 11652  
Nikko  
10178  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Pacific  
10556, 10714, 11037,  
11324  
Nokia  
10208  
Minato  
Madison  
10037  
Norcent  
Nordmende  
11365  
Minerva  
10195, 11248  
11667  
Palladium  
Palsonic  
Panama  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10037, 10698  
10037  
Magnavox  
10171, 11454, 11365,  
11506, 11755, 11867,  
12372  
10037, 10714, 10560,  
10195, 11585, 11667,  
12001  
Ministry Of Sound  
Minoka  
10037  
Mirai  
11666  
Magnum  
Manesth  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
Mark  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10037  
Normerel  
Nortek  
Novatronic  
Novita  
Nu-Tec  
O.K.Line  
Oceanic  
Odys  
10037  
Panasonic  
11480, 10037, 10650,  
10508, 10208, 11636,  
12170  
Mitsubishi  
10150, 11250, 10178,  
10556, 10037, 11037,  
10512, 11171  
10668  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11454, 10556, 10037  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10499  
10037  
Panavision  
Panda  
10037  
11585  
Mivar  
10609  
10698, 10508, 10208  
11636  
10698  
Moree  
10037  
Pansonic  
Penney  
Perdio  
Master's  
Mastro  
11037, 11324  
10208  
Morgan's  
Moserbaer  
MTC  
10037  
10178  
10698  
11585  
10037  
Masuda  
Matsui  
10037  
12719  
10512  
Perfekt  
Petters  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10195, 11037, 10208,  
11666, 11667  
Okano  
OKI  
10037  
MTlogic  
Mudan  
Multitec  
Multitech  
Myrica  
Myryad  
NAD  
10714  
10037  
11585, 11667  
11610, 12124  
10698  
10208  
Philco  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
11394  
Olevia  
Omni  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
Matsushita  
Maxent  
Maxess  
Meck  
10650  
11755  
Philips  
Phocus  
10178, 10171, 11454,  
10556, 10037, 10512,  
10605, 10690, 11394,  
11506, 11867, 12372  
Onei  
11667  
11666  
12493  
Onida  
10653  
10556  
10698  
Onimax  
10714  
10178, 10037  
Mediator  
10556, 10037  
10714, 11652  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Phoenix  
Television  
Reflex  
Television  
Sei-Sinudyne  
Serie Dorada  
Shanghai  
Television  
SunBriteTV  
Sungoo  
10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11585  
10037  
10178  
10208  
11610  
Phonola  
10556, 10037  
Relisys  
Remotec  
Reoc  
11248  
Pioneer  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11457, 11636, 12171  
10171, 10037  
10714  
Sunny  
10037  
Sharp  
10650, 10818, 11165,  
11423, 11659  
Sunstar  
10037  
Plantron  
10037  
Revox  
10037  
Sunstech  
Sunwood  
Supersonic  
SuperTech  
Supra  
12001  
Playsonic  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
Shintoshi  
Shivaki  
Siam  
10037  
RFT  
10037  
10037  
10178, 10037  
10037  
Roadstar  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715  
10208  
Powerpoint  
Prinston  
10037, 10698  
11037, 10715  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10178  
Rolson  
Rowa  
12001, 12098  
10037, 10698  
10625, 10714, 10560  
10618  
Siemens  
Siera  
10037, 10195  
10556, 10037  
10037  
Profitronic  
Proline  
Svasa  
10208  
10037, 10625, 10634,  
11037  
Saba  
Silva  
Swisstec  
Sylvania  
11614, 11775  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Salora  
Sampo  
Silva Schneider  
Silver  
10037  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886  
Prosonic  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11324, 11585, 11667,  
11709, 12001  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10208, 12001  
10715  
SilverCrest  
Sinudyne  
SKY  
11037  
Symphonic  
Synco  
10171, 11394  
10178, 11755  
11610  
10178, 10171, 10650,  
11755  
10037  
Protech  
Proton  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10178  
10037, 11614, 11775  
10037, 10698  
11324  
Syntax  
Sysline  
Tacico  
Talent  
Samsung  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10618, 10650, 10208,  
12051  
Skyworth  
Sliding  
SLX  
10037  
ProVision  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11324  
10178  
Pvision  
Pye  
12001  
10668  
10178  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
11248, 12001  
10556, 10037  
10208  
Solavox  
Soniko  
Soniq  
10037  
Tashiko  
Tatung  
TCL  
10650  
Qingdao  
Quasar  
Quelle  
10037  
10037, 11248, 11324  
11037, 10508, 10208,  
11142, 11365, 11585,  
11667, 11974  
10650  
12493  
10698, 12403, 12429,  
12434, 13183  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10512  
Sonitron  
Sonneclair  
Sonoko  
Sonolor  
Sontec  
10208  
SBR  
10556, 10037  
TCM  
Teac  
10714, 12001  
10037  
R-Line  
10037  
Schaub Lorenz  
10714, 11324, 11363,  
11667, 12001  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10698, 10512, 11248,  
11363, 11709, 11755  
10037  
Radiola  
10556, 10037  
10037  
10208  
Schneider  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037  
Radiomarelli  
RadioShack  
Radiotone  
RCA  
10037  
10178, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
Sony  
10810, 11505, 11167,  
11651, 11825  
Tec  
10037  
Schoentech  
Scotch  
Scott  
11037  
Tech Line  
Technica  
Technics  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technisson  
Techno  
10037, 10668  
11037  
10178  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560, 10618, 11781,  
12247, 12403, 12429,  
12434, 12746, 12932  
Soundesign  
Soundwave  
Sowa  
10178  
10178  
10037, 11037, 10715  
10178  
10556, 10650  
11667  
Sears  
10178, 10171  
10634  
Seaway  
Seelver  
SEG  
Squareview  
Standard  
Starlite  
10171  
Realistic  
Recor  
10178  
10037  
10037  
10037  
10556  
11037  
10037, 11037, 11709  
10037  
10714, 11652  
11585  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
12719  
Rectiligne  
Redstar  
Strato  
10037  
SEI  
10037  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Toyoda  
Television  
VU  
VCR  
Technosonic  
10556, 10625, 10499,  
11324  
11709  
11365, 12098  
11667  
Humax  
Panasonic  
Philips  
20739  
TRANS-continents  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
Walker  
Waltham  
Wansa  
20614, 20616  
20739  
Techvision  
Techwood  
Tecnimagen  
Teco  
11709  
10037, 10668, 11037  
12098  
11037, 11667  
10556  
Transonic  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11363  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
20614, 20616  
20614, 20616  
20636  
Wards  
10178  
Triad  
10556  
10178, 10653  
10208, 11709  
10150  
Watson  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037  
Trio  
11248  
Tedelex  
TiVo  
20636, 20739  
Triumph  
TVTEXT 95  
Uher  
10556, 10037  
10556  
Teknika  
Wega  
10037  
TELE System  
Telecor  
11585  
Welltech  
Weltstar  
10714, 11652  
11037  
PVR  
10037  
10037  
DirecTV  
Go Video  
Humax  
Panasonic  
Philips  
20739  
Ultravox  
UMC  
10037  
Telefunken  
10037, 10625, 10714,  
10560, 10698, 11585,  
11667  
Westinghouse  
Wharfedale  
11755  
20614  
11614, 11775  
10037  
10556, 10037, 11324,  
11667  
20739  
Unic Line  
Uniden  
United  
20614, 20616  
20739  
Telefusion  
Telegazi  
Telemeister  
Telesonic  
Telestar  
10037  
12122  
White Westinghouse 10037  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 10715, 11652  
Wilson  
10556  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
20614, 20616  
20614, 20616  
20636  
10037  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Wintel  
10668, 11037  
10556  
10037  
Unitek  
11709  
10556, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
Universal  
Universum  
10037, 10714  
10714  
TiVo  
20636, 20739  
Teletech  
Teleview  
Tennessee  
Tensai  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10618, 10512  
World-of-Vision  
Wyse  
12001  
11365  
TV/VCR Combination  
Univox  
10037  
10037  
Xenius  
10634  
Amstrad  
Ferguson  
Fidelity  
GoldStar  
Grundig  
LG  
10171  
V7 Videoseven  
Vestel  
11666, 11755  
10037, 11037, 10715  
Xiahua  
10698  
10625  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
11585, 11667  
Tesla  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
XLogic  
10698  
10171  
Xrypton  
Yamaha  
Yamishi  
Yokan  
10037  
10037  
Vexa  
10037  
Tevion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11248,  
11585, 11667  
10650, 11576  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10195  
10178  
Victor  
10650, 10653, 11428  
10037, 10508  
10037  
Videocon  
VideoSystem  
Vidtech  
10037  
Mitsubishi  
Philips  
Radiola  
Saba  
10556  
Thomson  
Thorn  
10037, 10625, 10560  
10037, 10499, 10512  
10499  
Yoko  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10556  
10178  
YU-MA-TU  
Zenith  
10037  
Thorn-Ferguson  
TMK  
Viewsonic  
11365, 11564, 11755,  
12049  
10178, 10037, 11365,  
11423, 12358  
10625  
10178  
Sanyo  
11974  
Tokai  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11037  
Vision  
Vistron  
Vivax  
10037  
Zepto  
Zonda  
11585  
10698  
Schneider  
Sharp  
10556, 10037  
10818  
Tokaido  
Topline  
Toshiba  
11363  
10668, 11037  
11709  
Siemens  
Sony  
10037  
10195, 11037, 10618,  
10650, 10508, 11169,  
11508, 11524, 11652,  
12203  
Vizio  
11758, 12209  
10037  
VCR  
11505  
Vortec  
Voxson  
DirecTV  
Go Video  
20739  
20614  
Teac  
10178, 10171  
10178, 10037  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
TV/VCR Combination  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Technics  
Thomson  
10556  
Dantax  
Denon  
30539, 30713  
Harman/Kardon  
Henss  
30582, 31229, 33228  
30713  
Maxim  
MDS  
30713  
10625  
30490, 30634, 31634,  
32258, 32748  
30713  
Hitachi  
30573, 30713, 31664  
30713  
Medion  
Memorex  
Metz  
30630, 30741  
32213  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
31152  
DVD  
Hoeher  
3D LAB  
Accurian  
Acoustic Solutions  
AEG  
30539  
30675  
30713  
HotMedia  
Humax  
31152  
30571, 30713  
30503, 30539  
30539  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
Digix Media  
Disney  
30713  
30646  
Micromedia  
Micromega  
Microsoft  
Minax  
30713  
Inno Hit  
Insignia  
30713  
31394  
30675  
30741, 30675, 32428,  
32596  
30522, 32083  
30713  
30675  
AFK  
31152  
DSE  
30675, 31152  
30713  
Integra  
30503, 30571, 30627,  
31612, 31634, 32147  
Aiwa  
30533  
Mitsubishi  
Momitsu  
NAD  
30713  
Dual  
Akai  
30675  
30539, 30713  
33052  
33052  
Durabrand  
Dynex  
30675, 30713  
32596  
Irradio  
JVC  
30646  
Alba  
30741  
30503, 30539, 30623,  
30867, 31597, 31602,  
32855  
Ambiance  
Amstrad  
Anthem  
Aristona  
ASDA  
NEC  
30741, 31602  
Dyon  
33052  
30713  
Onkyo  
30503, 30627, 31612,  
32147, 30571, 31634  
eBench  
Elfunk  
31152  
32820  
Kendo  
Kennex  
Kenwood  
Lenco  
Lexicon  
LG  
30713  
30713  
Oppo  
30575, 32545  
30713  
30539, 30646  
32213  
30713  
30713  
Elite  
31152  
Orion  
30490, 30534  
30713, 33052  
32545  
Emerson  
EuroLine  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
30675, 32213  
30675  
Ormond  
Pacific  
30713  
Audix  
30713  
Autovox  
Awa  
30713  
30713  
Palladium  
Panasonic  
30713  
32587  
30741, 31602  
33052  
30741  
30503, 30490, 31579,  
31641, 32523, 32710,  
32859  
Basic Line  
Bel Canto Design  
Black Diamond  
Blue Parade  
Blue Sky  
Brandt  
30713  
31571  
Limit  
Firstline  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
30713  
Lodos  
Loewe  
30713  
33052  
30713  
30539, 30741, 32474,  
32783  
Pelican Accessories  
Philco  
30533  
30675  
30675  
30571  
GE  
30522  
30713  
Logik  
30713  
Philips  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31340,  
31354, 32056, 32084,  
32434, 32689  
GFM  
30675  
30503  
30713  
31152  
Lumatron  
Lunatron  
Luxman  
Luxor  
30741, 30713  
30741  
Global Sphere  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Goodmans  
GPX  
31152  
Bush  
30741  
C-Tech  
30573  
30741  
Pioneer  
30571, 30142, 30631,  
31571, 32442, 32860  
California Audio Labs 30490  
30713  
30713, 31152  
30741  
Cambridge Audio  
Centrum  
32808  
Magnavox  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31354  
Polk Audio  
Presidian  
ProAudio  
Proscan  
Proson  
30539  
30675, 30713  
30627  
30675  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
30713  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
30713  
Changhong  
Cinetec  
31394  
30539, 30713  
30713  
30539, 32414, 32432,  
33444  
30713  
30522  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
30675  
Mark  
30713  
30713  
30713  
Haaz  
31152  
30713  
Matsui  
Pye  
30539, 30646  
Hanseatic  
30741  
Crown  
30713  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Blu-ray Disc  
Sony  
Radionette  
Radiotone  
RCA  
30741  
30713  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tamashi  
Tandberg  
Targa  
30630, 30675  
30675  
Yamaha  
30490, 30539, 30646,  
30817, 31354, 32298,  
32299  
31516, 32180  
30675  
Sylvania  
Toshiba  
Vizio  
30522, 30571, 32213,  
32587  
31394  
32551, 32705, 33157  
32563  
Zenith  
30503, 30741  
30713  
REC  
30490  
32213  
31394  
30713  
30623  
30741  
30741  
Yamaha  
32298, 32299  
Blu-ray Disc  
Ambiance  
Anthem  
Red  
Tchibo  
TCL  
30741  
33052  
Redstar  
Roadstar  
Rotel  
DVD-R  
Accurian  
Aristona  
Denon  
32587  
32820  
30675  
30646  
30490  
30675  
30675  
30741  
30741  
31664  
30646  
30646  
31597  
30741  
30741  
30646, 30675  
30741  
TCM  
30741  
Cambridge Audio  
Denon  
32808  
Teac  
30571, 30741, 30675,  
31394  
32258, 32748  
33052  
Salora  
Samsung  
Dyon  
30490, 30573, 30199,  
30820, 31635, 32069,  
32329, 32489, 33195  
Technica  
Technics  
Techwood  
Teletech  
30713  
30490  
30713  
30713  
30571  
30522  
Emerson  
Funai  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
33052  
30675  
Go Video  
GPX  
Sanyo  
30713  
Harman/Kardon  
Insignia  
33228  
Schneider  
Schoentech  
Scott  
30539, 30646, 30713  
30713  
30675, 32428, 32596  
Theta Digital  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
Hitachi  
Humax  
Irradio  
JVC  
Integra  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
31394  
30503, 31639, 32277,  
32551, 32705, 33157  
SEG  
30713  
JVC  
32855  
Semp  
30503  
Transonic  
TVE  
31394  
LG  
Lenco  
33052  
Sharp  
30630, 30675, 30713,  
32250, 32474, 32652,  
32869  
30713  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Medion  
Panasonic  
Lexicon  
LG  
32545  
United  
30675, 30713, 31152  
30741, 30713  
30503  
30741, 31602  
33052  
Universum  
Urban Concepts  
Vestel  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Silva Schneider  
SilverCrest  
Skantic  
30741, 33052  
30533  
Limit  
30490, 31579, 32523,  
32710, 32859  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Momitsu  
Onkyo  
32474, 32783  
30675  
30713  
30741  
Victor  
31597  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Pye  
30646, 31340  
30631, 32860  
30646  
31152  
32414, 32432, 33444  
33052  
Vizio  
32563  
30539, 30713  
31152  
Vtrek  
32587  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
Waltham  
Wellington  
Weltstar  
Wharfedale  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Xbox  
30713  
RCA  
30522  
30713  
30713  
Samsung  
Schneider  
Sharp  
30490, 31635  
30646  
Sony  
30533, 30864, 31033,  
31070, 31431, 31516,  
31633, 32180  
30713  
Oppo  
32545  
30713  
Panasonic  
Philips  
31641, 32523, 32859  
32084, 32434, 32689  
30142, 32442  
30199, 33195  
32250, 32474, 32652  
33052  
30630, 30675, 32869  
Soundwave  
Star Clusters  
Strato  
30713  
31152  
31152  
30713  
31152  
30713  
Sony  
31033, 31070, 31431,  
31516, 31633, 32180  
30573  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sharp  
Sylvania  
Targa  
30675  
30522, 32083  
31152  
30741  
Strong  
XLogic  
Toshiba  
31639, 32277, 32551  
Supervision  
Sherwood  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD-R  
Victor  
TV/DVD Combination  
31597  
30646  
30741  
Magnavox  
Matsui  
12372  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
11037, 30713  
12719  
Medion  
Nordmende  
Odys  
12001  
HD-DVD  
Integra  
LG  
12719  
32901, 33104 33504  
30741  
Panasonic  
Philips  
12170  
11454, 10556, 11394,  
30539  
Microsoft  
Onkyo  
Xbox  
32083  
Powerpoint  
Prosonic  
Pvision  
RCA  
10698  
32901, 33104 33504  
32083  
12001  
12001  
TV/DVD Combination  
Akai  
12746, 12932  
12001  
11675  
Schaub Lorenz  
SEG  
Black Diamond  
Blue Sky  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
11037, 12719, 30713  
10818  
Sharp  
Bush  
11037, 10698, 12719,  
30713  
Soniq  
12493  
Sunstech  
Sylvania  
12001  
Centrum  
Crown  
DMTech  
Dual  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
12001  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886, 30630, 30675  
Teac  
10698  
11037, 30713  
12049  
Technica  
Telefunken  
Teletech  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
United  
11037, 30713  
10698  
Dynex  
Elfunk  
Emerson  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
10625  
11394, 11864, 11886,  
30675  
11524  
Ferguson  
Goodmans  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
30713  
11037, 30713  
30713  
Universum  
Vestel  
11037  
30539  
Viewsonic  
Weltstar  
12049  
12001  
11037, 30713  
Hanseatic  
Hitachi  
Insignia  
JVC  
12001  
11037, 11667, 30713  
12049  
12271  
LG  
11423  
Logik  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
Luxor  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Memo  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Y1112-1  
SN 29401094  
(C) Copyright 2012 ONKYO SOUND & VISION CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 0 9 4 *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 

NeumannBerlin Microphone PS 87 POPSCREEN User Manual
Olympus MP3 Player DM 1 User Manual
Optimus Katadyn Products Inc VCR MODEL 110 MODEL 60 User Manual
Oster Bread Maker 5858 User Manual
Panasonic Answering Machine KX TG4132 User Manual
Panasonic Answering Machine KX TG5871AL User Manual
Panasonic Home Theater System SC PTX5 User Manual
Panasonic Smoke Alarm 4318 User Manual
Panasonic Telephone KX TC1430W User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 1110ARC User Manual